JP2018086388A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabling a player to keep motivated for participating in a game.SOLUTION: During reservation of start winning to become a "special symbol jackpot" and when the jackpot kind of the current special symbol is "jackpot A," and the jackpot kind of a next special symbol is "jackpot C," "time-shortening period display" is performed in ending performance corresponding to respective jackpots. Thus, a player can recognize the time-shortening period of the current normal symbol and the time-shortening period of the next normal symbol respectively, so that when the jackpot of the next special symbol occurs, it is possible to give an impression to the player that the time-shortening period of the normal symbol has been extended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time-shortening period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than previously, so that it is possible to increase the player's motivation for participating in the game. Thus, it is possible to keep the player motivated for participating in the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 32

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with a winning game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the game value given to the player along with the transition is notified in advance (Preliminary effects) are made, and the device is designed to increase the player's expectation by making the player recognize in advance the transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player and the value of the game to be given. ing.

  In such a pachinko machine, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit and the game state is shifted to a special game state, a special period is a period during which the game ball can easily enter the start opening as a game value given to the player. The length of is set according to the jackpot type. In addition, there is one that performs the above-described notice effect and notifies the player of the length of the special period in advance. On the other hand, in such a pachinko machine, when a new lottery is performed with a special period remaining, and the lottery result is a big hit and a transition is made to a special game state, the length of the special period in the future will be Many are set according to the jackpot type of a new lottery result.

JP 11-333089 A

  In this type of pachinko machine, if the special period remains, it will be a big hit, and the new special period will be longer than the previous special period. If the notice effect is made so that only one of the length of the special period is recognized by the player, it will be difficult for the player to compare the length of the special period, so it seems as if the special period has been extended. Even in this case, the player may not recognize it and may not feel that the player has gained an advantage. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may not continue.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continuously have a willingness to participate in a game.

Means for Solving the Problems and Effects of the Invention

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one stored random number information is acquired by the stored information acquiring means, a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, there is an effect that the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is the second more than the first special period. If the special period is longer, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the special period has been extended, and to make the player feel advantageous. As a result, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is the second more than the first special period. If the special period is longer, the value information is present in both the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so as to be notified. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is longer than the first special period, the length of the first special period And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period and the player can feel that the special period has been extended, the player can feel that the player has gained an advantage. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the length of the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison means is If the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, a notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period, and a second The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified both in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the special period. Therefore, the first special period is set when a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain and the first special period is the shortest but the second special period is the longest. And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Accordingly, the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period, and the player can feel that the special period has been extended the most, so that the player can feel more advantageous. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the jackpot production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the delay prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fanfare command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to an embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are three types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, and “Big jackpot C”. After the special game state is over, these jackpot types are added as added value after the jackpot ends. A game value (game value) corresponding to the game is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”.

  “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, and “Big jackpot C” all become a special game state with 5 rounds (5R jackpot), and then, after the jackpot ends, as added value after the jackpot ends Until the special symbol lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change). However, in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the jackpot is different for the “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C”. Specifically, “Big Jack A” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times, and “Big Jack B” Until the lottery ends 50 times, the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased. With “Big Jack C”, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. .

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (5R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends four times. This is called the probability variation period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability variation period of the special symbol is shown by using the number of lotteries of the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol probability change period is four times until the special symbol lottery ends, the special symbol probability change period is described as four times. Also, after the special symbol jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, that is, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery ends a predetermined number of times (20 times, 50 times, 100 times). The period between is usually referred to as a short time period of the symbol. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is shown by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is 20 times.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common, and depending on the type of jackpot, the “short time of normal symbols” The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Also, for example, instead of changing the period when the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory in the hit of a normal symbol. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A” is finished, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times, and “Big Jack B” is obtained. After the “Big Bonus B”, the regular symbol time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. When the “Big Bonus C” is reached, the special symbol lottery is 100 times after the “Big Bonus C”. The normal symbol time-short state continues until the end, but the duration of the short-time state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed 60 times, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. After that, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from a “special symbol low probability state” to a “special symbol high probability state”, regardless of the type of jackpot of that special symbol, the special symbol jackpot ends. Until the special symbol lottery ends four times. On the other hand, after a special symbol jackpot, after the jackpot ends and when the special symbol lottery ends four times, if the special symbol jackpot is not newly reached, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed to the special symbol after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. The lottery is continued until 4 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed four times after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this case, until at least six lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the four special symbol lotteries performed after the new jackpot are completed, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “ordinary symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery after the jackpot of the special symbol ends (for example, , 20 times, 50 times, 100 times). On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”. As described above, the predetermined number of times is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol. If the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the predetermined number of times is 20, and if the big hit type is “big hit B”, the predetermined number of times is If it is 50 times and “big hit C”, the predetermined number of times is 100 times.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further changed after the new special symbol jackpot ends. This is continued until the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of jackpots is completed. For example, after becoming “big hit A” and moving to “normal symbol time-short state”, when the “special symbol time-short state” becomes “hit C” in the 10th special symbol lottery, ”Is continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  As a result, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly made during the duration of the “ordinary symbol time saving state”, the normal symbol time saving period remaining until the new jackpot is invalidated. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, as soon as “special symbol jackpot A” is reached, the short time period of the normal symbol until then becomes invalid, and the “normal symbol normal state” will be drawn after the end of the “big jackpot A”. It will continue until it is finished 20 times. Therefore, when the short time period of normal symbols has been “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times” is given to the player. As a result, the player may feel dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost of the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. there were. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the player may be notified of a short time period of a normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  In particular, it is a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the jackpot ends. Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if the jackpot of another special symbol is made during the probability change period of the special symbol, the player may use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the normal symbol so far. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state and a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the jackpot effect ends (ending effect described later is performed), a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, Alternatively, the short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” being executed is performed. In the present embodiment, when performing the ending effect, the “definite effect display” is displayed based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize. Control is performed so that the player continues to have a willingness to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the start winning, the “determination effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the reserved start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot C”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the start information in the middle, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but this special symbol The ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time, when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of You may comprise so that "short-term display" may not be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player feels lost of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In addition, there is a start winning that is “special design jackpot” in the start winning prize that is on hold, the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, and in the start information that is on hold If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on this, the “short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot. In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the starting information in the inside, “short-term display” is performed in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” is displayed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot You can go. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (a high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which are even numbers, are added are arranged. In addition, if it is “big hit B”, a variable display in which main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, and 9” except “7” are added is displayed. Fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols to which the odd number “7” is added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is out of place, a continuous notice effect is performed that suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit (notice). In this case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, “3”, “4”, “1” in the main symbol combination in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1. ), The so-called “chance” is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show display screens displayed in the ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect. FIG.

  In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and then a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 has the first symbol display device. In response to the 37 variation display, the 3rd symbol variation display is performed.

  When the 3rd symbol variation display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the 3rd symbol's high-speed variation display is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). When the time elapses, the display switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are aligned is performed, the variation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are not aligned is performed, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol will be drawn and the next variation effect will be started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and also notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol time period) given to the player after the jackpot ends (displays the time period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that a lottery result will be a big hit in a special symbol lottery that is on hold (to perform a definite effect display). In the ending effect, the fact that the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) is notified to the player is referred to as “short time period display”, and the lottery result becomes a big hit in the special symbol lottery that is on hold. This is referred to as “confirmed effect display” being performed.

  When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in accordance with the timing at which the stop display of the third symbol is made. A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare effect is started following the variation effect.

  Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the fanfare effect. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the state is continued until the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated five times (5 rounds).

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. After that, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round production from the 1st round to the 5th round is performed in order.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is completed five times (five rounds). As a result, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending effect, the end of the special gaming state is notified to the player, and a short time period display is performed (the game value given to the player after the jackpot end (the short time period of the normal symbol) is the game. Or a finalized effect display is performed (the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big hit in the special symbol lottery that is on hold). Whether “short-term display” or “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect depends on the jackpot type of the special symbol, the jackpot type of the reserved special symbol, and the value of the ending mode counter 223e. And so on.

  When “short time display” is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “50 chances” (period) is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. An example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is made and the lottery result is “Big Jack B”. After the jackpot is over, the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. Means to continue. In addition, when the “short time period display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, “20 chances” (an example of period information) is displayed, and the special symbol is displayed. If the lottery result is “big hit C”, “100 chances” (an example of period information) is displayed. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period in which the normal symbol time-saving state will continue (the normal symbol time-saving period).

  The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the second entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be an opportunity to win the normal symbol. Become more. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, when the “definite effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, “Super Chance!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Another example of information) is displayed. This screen means that a lottery result will always be a big hit if any lottery is held among lots of special symbols that are on hold. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that it will be a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol lottery that has been put on hold. Can be held. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7, 107, 282” is a special symbol for the low probability. Stored in the jackpot random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 44” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “45 to 89” is “Big Jack B”, and the jackpot type when the value is “90 to 99” is “Big Jack C”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hits (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) are determined by the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Yes. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back off” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth off” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that becomes a normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is "5-28". These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probable change. It includes a counter 203e, a time reduction counter 203f, a pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, a probability-changing success / failure determination execution flag 203h, and a pre-reading delay flag 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice determination counter 223g, a series of fluctuating effects held at that time To determine whether or not to perform a continuous notice effect.

  The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the special symbol lottery result that accompanies the winning (start prize) at the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol. Thus, the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against. In this embodiment, when continuous notice effects are performed over all the variable effects held at the time of winning a prize, chances are displayed in each variable effect, but the same character or the same in each variable effect You may comprise so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. Moreover, you may display so that the number of the same characters and the number of characters related to the same character may be increased every time each variation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the variation effect different from the normal one has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all of the variation effects that have been put on hold.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1. Of the series of variation effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the last variation effect is not displayed as a chance symbol as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. Even if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player can win the special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be expected.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, the predicted various information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the various information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as a winning information. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is made. Set the mode. In this way, main controller 110 predicts various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning from each counter value acquired in accordance with the starting winning ( For the complicated processes such as the process of deciding whether or not to start the continuous notice effect based on the various information (presence / absence, stop type, fluctuation pattern), the voice lamp control This is done with the device 113. Thereby, the process in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 113, the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect can be set in various modes.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (Refer to S704 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 22).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 of FIG. 23: No).

  The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable variation state. If the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and 4 is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, 4 is simply set regardless of the value of the probability changing counter 203e (see S212 in FIG. 18). After that, while the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S219 in FIG. 18).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. If the value of the middle counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S304 and S305 in FIG. 19).

  Further, in the special symbol variation start process, a probability variation success / failure determination execution flag 203h, which will be described later, is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203e. In the special symbol variation start process, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state)” based on the value of the probability variation counter 203e. Therefore, the probability change determination flag 203h can be easily and reliably set. As will be described later, the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 at intervals of 2 milliseconds, but in the timer interrupt process in which the prefetch is being performed. Whether or not to perform the next timer interruption process can be easily and reliably set based on the setting of the probability change determination determination flag 203h.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203f.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 20, and when it is determined to be “big hit B”, it is set to 50, and “big hit C”. If it is determined that it is, 100 is set (see S214 to S216 in FIG. 18). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is ended until the value of the hour / minute counter 203f becomes 0 (S221 in FIG. 18).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 22).

  When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning prize, the pachinko machine 10 Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a flag that indicates what should be done.

  When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S914 in FIG. 25), and is set to 4 every time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is a special symbol jackpot. . That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, it is simply set to 4 regardless of the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (see S507 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the pre-reading of the lottery for the special symbol is completed (S509 in FIG. 21).

  When the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a stop type selection table for high probability, and Each table of the special symbol jackpot type table is compared with the winning data acquired in accordance with the starting winning prize. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, each of the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, the stop type selection table for the low probability time, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and the start winning prize The winning data acquired in response is compared.

  Probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol probability change state (high probability of a special symbol) in the timer interrupt processing being executed among timer interrupt processing executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds. Is a flag indicating that a special symbol lottery has been performed. If the probability change determination flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state during the timer interruption process being executed. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery was performed when the pachinko machine 10 was in the normal state of the special symbol during the timer interruption process being executed, or In the timer interrupt process being executed, the pachinko machine 10 indicates that the special symbol lottery is not performed regardless of the special symbol special state or the special symbol normal state.

  This probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is normally set to OFF. When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds is started and the timer interrupt process is being executed, and the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more in the timer interrupt process. When a special symbol change start process (see FIG. 19) for performing a lottery (whether or not determination) of “special symbol big hit” or “extra special symbol” is executed, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is set to ON. (See S303 in FIG. 19). As a result, it is possible to easily and reliably indicate that the special symbol lottery (whether or not) has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state during the timer interruption process being executed. it can.

  Then, the probability change execution determination flag 203h is more than the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 17) including the special symbol variation start process among the processes executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). It is referred to in a start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) executed later. In the start winning process, if the winning change determination flag 203h during probability change is ON, even if the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 due to the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64, the special symbol The lottery result prefetching (see S408 in FIG. 20) is skipped and made unexecuted (see S407: Yes in FIG. 20). In this way, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading of the lottery with the special symbol by the probability change success / failure execution flag 203h.

  Here, in the start winning process, the reason why the lottery pre-reading in the special symbol is skipped and not executed when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on will be described. As described above, when the timer interrupt process is executed, various processes are executed, and after the special symbol variation process is executed, the start winning process is executed. In addition, as described above, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol during the timer interruption process being executed. It is shown that That is, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, a special symbol variation process that is executed prior to the start winning process is executed in the timer interruption process being executed, and as a result, the special symbol is changed. In the variation processing, it means that a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is made when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state.

  As described above, when the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the first hit stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the values match each other, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 makes a pass / fail judgment by comparing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the execution area with each of the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. Therefore, if a matching value is not found, the processing takes a long time. Further, if a matching value is not found and the result of the special symbol lottery (decision of success / failure) is lost, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the stop type selection table as a process for determining the stop type at the time of disconnection. Since the process of comparing with the random number value being performed is performed, the process further takes time. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to a random number value that becomes a “rear and forward outreach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred, After the occurrence, a process is performed to compare the random number value that becomes “reach other than front / rear out” that stops when the final stop symbol is not before or after the reach symbol, or the random value that becomes “completely out” without reach.

  Further, the MPU 201 provided in the main controller 110 normally uses an 8-bit MPU to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, but using this 8-bit MPU, a 2-byte MPU is used. It takes a lot of processing time to compare the values of the first random number counter C1 which is a counter.

  On the other hand, in the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol, the counter C1 for the first random number and the first type counter C2 acquired by entering the ball into the first entrance 64 as in the case of the original special symbol lottery. From the value of the stop type selection counter C3, various types of information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) obtained when the original special symbol lottery is performed are predicted (estimated).

  Therefore, assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the special symbol is in a probabilistic state, when prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol, the value of the counter C1 per first random number acquired by entering the first entrance 64 is calculated. Compare each of the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability with the random number stored in the stop type selection table. Compare. Therefore, this processing also requires a lot of processing time.

  As a result, in one timer interruption process, a special symbol lottery executed when the special symbol variation display starts, and a special symbol executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. When the lottery result prefetching is executed together, the processing time exceeds the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt processing being executed is executed. However, there was a possibility that it could not be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is ON, the lottery pre-reading in the special symbol is skipped and is not executed. When the symbol is in a probable change state, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery and the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interruption process. In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interruption is performed, and the start winning process (see FIG. 17) for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol. (Refer to S106), the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable state of the special symbol before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. It can be determined easily and reliably. Therefore, the special symbol lottery (whether or not determination), which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably performed with priority in the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the probability change execution determination flag 203h is reset to OFF at the end of the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) (see S415 in FIG. 20). As a result, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is set to ON / OFF in the special symbol variation process every time the timer interrupt process is executed. It should be noted that resetting the probability change execution determination flag 203h during the probability change is not necessarily performed at the end of the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17), and the timer interruption process being executed is ended after the start winning process is completed. You can do it before. In addition, the probability change determination flag 203h may be reset at the start of the timer interrupt process.

  Whether the prefetch delay flag 203i performs the delay prefetch process (see S105 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process being executed among the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 18) executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds. It is a flag indicating whether or not. When this flag is on, it indicates that delayed prefetch processing is performed during the timer interrupt processing being executed. When it is off, delayed prefetch processing is performed during the timer interrupt processing being performed. Indicates not to do.

  The delayed look-ahead process is a lottery for a special symbol based on the values of various counters obtained by the entry when a ball entering the first entrance 64 is detected by the previous timer interruption process. This is a process of prefetching the result (see FIG. 21). When this delay prefetching process is executed by the MPU 201, the state of the prefetch delay flag 203i is confirmed, and if the state is on (see S501 in FIG. 21), the lottery result is prefetched in the special symbol ( (See S502 to S509 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the state of the prefetch delay flag 203i is off (see S501 in FIG. 21), the prefetch process of the special symbol is not prefetched, the delay prefetch process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The prefetch delay flag 203i is normally set to off. Then, in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) executed in the timer interruption process, when the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 due to the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64, the probability change When the medium win / fail determination execution flag 203h is on and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped and not executed (S407: Yes in FIG. 20), the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on.

  As a result, during the timer interruption process being executed, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed, and the probability changing success / failure determination flag 203h is turned on Then, even if the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the timer interruption being executed, the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, and the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. Skipped rather than done. However, since the prefetch delay flag 203i is referred to when the next timer interrupt process is executed, it is easy and reliable that the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol was not performed in the previous timer interrupt process. The lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read based on the values of the various counters acquired with the winnings detected in the previous timer interruption process.

  Therefore, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be surely performed in the previous timer interrupt process, and the previous timer interrupt is performed. If prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped during the process, the prefetching can be performed in the next timer interrupt process, so the chance of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is reduced. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player. Further, in this case, in the next timer interruption process in which the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, so the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, This can be done without causing a large delay.

  Note that the prefetch delay flag 203i is reset to off when it is confirmed that the prefetch delay flag 203i is on during the delay prefetch processing, and the lottery result prefetch is performed on a special symbol. In addition, since the variation effect executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variable effect is performed, the next timer allocation is performed. In the included process, a special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variation effect is never generated. Therefore, in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the variation effect that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is not started.

  In the present embodiment, the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Specifically, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided in correspondence with the first entrance 64 in one timer interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) is off. Is detected, it is detected in the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that the first entrance switch is ON, and further timer interrupt process (third timer interrupt process) When it is detected that the first entrance switch is turned on, it is detected that there is a ball winning at the first entrance 64. Thereby, when the output of the first entrance switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the winning of the ball. Thus, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, if the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process, In the timer interruption process, no winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. Therefore, the start winning is not detected in both of the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous.

  Here, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process, and the special symbol This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the lottery is performed. After that, the next timer interrupt process is executed, and if the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. In the timer interrupt process, the special symbol lottery is performed. The lottery result in the special symbol is not pre-read with the winning of a new ball in the first entrance 64. Therefore, there is no need to further delay the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol, such as waiting for prefetching after turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i until a plurality of timer interruption processes are executed. Therefore, in one timer interrupt process, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state, a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is performed, and the special timer lottery for which the special symbol lottery has been performed is performed. When a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the insertion process, the lottery result for the special symbol may be pre-read in the next timer interruption process.

  When the prefetch delay flag 203i is set to ON and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed in the delay prefetch processing, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) indicating the lottery result is used as the winning information command. It is included and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (S505 of S21).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a continuous notice determination table 222a. In addition, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an ending state counter 223e, and a short time display are displayed. A flag 223f, a continuous notice determination counter 223g, a continuous notice number counter 223h, and a post-notice big hit flag 223i are provided. For convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination table 222a in the ROM 222 will be described after explaining the continuous notice determination counter 223g in the RAM 223.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area. Thereafter, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the current time based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g. It is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for the series of fluctuating effects.

  As described above, the continuous notice effect suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol performed with the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol (notice). This is a kind of notice effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. Even if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player can win the special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be expected.

  The winning information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, a big jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state and displays a short time period (notifies the player of the game value (ordinary time period of normal symbol) given to the player after the jackpot ends) Or, it is an effect for performing a definite effect display (notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the special symbol lottery that is on hold).

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the winning information storing area 223a is referred to, and the stored winning information includes the winning information indicating the jackpot of the special symbol. If there is winning information indicating the special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning information is acquired. Then, based on the acquired special symbol jackpot type, the current special symbol jackpot type, the value of the ending mode counter 223e, etc., in the ending effect, "short time period display" or "confirmed effect display" is performed And a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect (“short time period display” or “determined effect display”) is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 30). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot) and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h. Or whether to set the stop type as a chance.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “special symbol jackpot”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1711 in FIG. 33). In addition, even when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out of special symbol” and the continuous notice counter 223h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see FIG. 33, S1711). On the other hand, if the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out of special symbol” and the continuous notice count counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance item is replaced with the extracted stop type. The stop type is set (see S1712 in FIG. 33).

  The ending mode counter 223e is a counter used for determining the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The updating of the ending mode counter 223e is performed, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 3, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3). In this embodiment, when the display mode in the ending effect is determined, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222, and the ending mode counter 223e is compared. Is determined to be a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table.

  Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223e is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is performed. (See S1612 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223e is other than a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “short time display” is performed. (See S1614 in FIG. 32).

  However, when deciding the display mode in the ending effect, there is a start winning that is “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winning, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C” In addition, when the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “hit A” based on the pending start information, “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “hit C”. The display mode of the ending effect is set in (see FIG. 32). In addition, there is a start winning that is “special design jackpot” in the start winning prize that is on hold, the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, and in the start information that is on hold Based on the jackpot type of the next special symbol based on “Big Jack C”, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that “short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot ( (See FIG. 32).

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect ("short time display" or "determined effect display") is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The short time period display flag 223f is a flag that is referred to when determining the display mode of the ending effect, and the short time period display flag 223f is normally set to OFF. When determining the display mode of the ending effect, if the short-term display flag 223f is off, the display mode of the ending effect is set to “short-time display” based on the value of the ending mode counter 223e described above. A determination is made as to “determined effect display”. On the other hand, when the display mode of the ending effect is determined, if the short time period display flag 223f is ON, the display mode of the ending effect is set to “short time period display”.

  The short-term display flag 223f has a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize when determining the display mode of the ending effect, and further, this special symbol jackpot type Is set to ON when the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot C” based on the pending start information. Here, when the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON, the display mode of the ending effect for this time ("big hit A") is set to "short time period display". Thereafter, when the display mode of the next ending effect is determined, the short-term display flag 223f is referred to, and if the flag is ON, the flag is turned OFF and the display mode of the ending effect of this time ("big hit C") is displayed. Is also set to “short time display”. As a result, when the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A” and the lottery jackpot type of the lottery that will be the next jackpot among the lottery of the special symbols that are put on hold is “jackpot C”, In the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, “short-term display” is performed.

  As described above, “Big Bonus A” has the shortest time period for normal symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Big Bonus C” has the shortest period for normal symbols “Lottery for special symbols” Until the end of 100 times ". Therefore, if the “Ending effect” corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time (“Big jackpot A”) and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of the next time (“Big jackpot C”) are performed respectively, It is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is greatly extended and the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is extended most. Further, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of normal symbols has become more advantageous than the previous time. Accordingly, the player can be given an impression that a game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  The continuous notice determination counter 223g is a counter used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous notice determination counter 223g is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the special symbol jackpot type of this time, the special jackpot type of the reserved special symbol, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, etc. Based on this, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1410 in FIG. 30).

  The value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is compared with a continuous notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 9) described below, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is within a range predetermined in the continuous notice determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1516 and S1517 in FIG. 31).

  When a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the continuous notice determination table 222a sets a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 31)). If satisfied, it is a table for setting “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 9, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables, a continuous notice determination table 222a1 for a big hit and a continuous notice determination table 222a2 for a loss. When the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main controller 110 is “special symbol jackpot”, the sound lamp controller 113 selects the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and receives the winning information. In the case where the success / failure is “exclusion of special symbol”, the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal is selected. Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol out”).

  The special symbol hold ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) in the sound lamp control device 113 can be taken as both the big hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing. A range of a continuous notice determination counter 223g that determines the start of a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined in association with each value “1” to “4”.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the consecutive notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot defines “0” as the consecutive notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, and the special symbol “0-15” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “2” of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice determination range is associated with the value “3” of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b. “0 to 39” is defined, and “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

  In addition, the consecutive notice determination table 222a2 at the time of detachment defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In association with “2”, “0-9” is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range, and “0-25” is set as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In accordance with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, “0 to 39” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 31)). If satisfied, one of the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability. Then, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b at that time is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g at that time is determined as the continuous notice determination. When included in the range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Now, as for the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing in the example of FIG. 9, the continuous notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b increases. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to make a decision to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of continuous notice determination increases, so that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of a big hit and the continuation at the time of losing Both of the notice determination tables 222a2 are defined such that the larger the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is, the higher the probability of continuous notice determination is. To do. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  9 is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the same special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is defined such that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit is the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing. In other words, the probability of continuous notice determination when the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “special symbol jackpot” is the probability of continuous notice decision when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out of special symbol”. Is set to be equal to or higher than Thereby, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is suggested to the player that the game state is likely to become a “special symbol jackpot” after the end of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, high expectations can be given to the player. In addition, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the lottery performed when winning the ball to the first entrance 64) is “special symbol jackpot” is “ Since it is set to be smaller than the probability of “out”, when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “exclusion of special symbol”, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being frequently performed. On the other hand, in the case of “special symbol jackpot”, it is possible to easily perform a continuous notice effect.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, not only when the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main control device 110 is “special symbol jackpot”, but the winning information is “excluded from special symbol”. Even when the variation pattern of the winning information is “out-of-front / reach reach”, the permission determination for the continuous notice effect is performed. Accordingly, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even when the variation pattern of the winning information is “out-of-front / reach reach” or the like, so the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed under various conditions. Can be done. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, since the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The continuous notice counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. When the initial value of the continuous notice counter 223h is set to 0 and a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the special symbol holding ball at that time The value of the number counter 223b is stored (see S1518 in FIG. 31).

  The value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more, instead of the extracted stop type, the chance eye is set as the stop type (see S1712 in FIG. 33), and the set stop type is The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1715 in FIG. 33).

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the active line L1 shown in FIG. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1711 in FIG. 33), and the set stop is set. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Note that the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is held at 0 (see S1714: No in FIG. 33). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 1, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, and therefore, as the stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 without setting the chance, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1711 in FIG. 33), and the set stop type is the display stop type. The display control device 114 is notified by the command. However, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1715 in FIG. 33).

  Thus, while the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more, every time a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, a chance item is set as the stop type, and the set value is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect being performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol that becomes a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous notice number counter 223h stores the value of the special symbol hold number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, and each time a stop type command is received thereafter. If the value is 1 or more, the value is decreased by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop symbols that become chance chances are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. That is, stop symbols that become chances are continuously displayed.

  Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop pattern of the changing effect most watched during the game. Even if the stop symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player will receive a special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. The expectation obtained can be given.

  Further, when the winning information command is received in the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (see FIG. 31 S1506). If the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (see S1507: Yes in FIG. 31), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. It determines with satisfying (condition 1) among the predetermined conditions mentioned above, and determines the start of a continuous notice effect with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, and wins the first entrance 64. Based on the winning data (each counter C1-C3 value) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched, and various information obtained by the prefetch (win / no-go, stop type, change) Pattern) is included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the winning information command, stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a, and decides to start the continuous notice effect according to the contents of the winning information storage area 223a. Judging. Then, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop type is set for each variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  As for the post-notice jackpot flag 223i, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice number counter 223h, so that all the continuous notice effects set for a plurality of variable effects are executed. It is a flag indicating a gaming state after a subsequent variation effect. When the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after execution of all the continuous notice effects is in the “special symbol jackpot” state. When the value of the flag 223i is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after the execution of all the continuous notice effects is in the “excluded special symbol” state. The variation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a change effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1.

  This post-notice jackpot flag 223i indicates the winning information extracted from the winning information command command when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect based on the winning information command received from the main controller 110. If the win is “special symbol jackpot”, ON is set (S1520 in FIG. 31), and if the win information extracted from the win information command command is “special symbol out”, OFF is set ( (S1521 in FIG. 31). The value is held until the next start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Further, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is being executed when the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the post-notice big hit flag 223i (see S1508 in FIG. 31). If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (see S1508: Yes in FIG. 31), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is a “special symbol jackpot” state, the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the meantime, it is determined whether there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) (that is, whether the difference between the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is three or more). Then, it is determined whether or not (condition 2) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above (see S1510 in FIG. 31).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is OFF (see S1508: No in FIG. 31), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the state of “excluding special symbol”, it is further determined whether or not the winning information newly notified by the winning information command is “special symbol jackpot”, and the predetermined condition described above It is determined whether or not (Condition 3) is satisfied (see S1511 in FIG. 31).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 34).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 11 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the change pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” in the lower right position toward the screen, and “◯” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 11 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 11 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.12 and FIG.13, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 12 and 13 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Is the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, FIG. 12B is the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 13 is the back C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the player changes the stage to “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 13A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 13C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.13 (a), and the back image of Fig.13 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 12A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Also, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 13A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 13A to 13B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 13A to 13B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images in FIGS. 13A to 13B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 13 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 13 (b) to 13 (c) and 13 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 13B to 13C and FIGS. 13C to 13A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 13A to 13B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images shown in FIGS. 13B to 13C and FIGS. 13C to 13A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  On the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 10) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special gaming state and informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 15 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 15).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 34). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 45B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 36) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S2109 of (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 44) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 45A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 36B). ) (See S2103)), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 16) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 36B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 42). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 46). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 36B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 27. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). When the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on in the previous timer interrupt process, a delay prefetch process for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is executed (S105). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S106). Details of the special symbol variation process, the delayed look-ahead process, and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S107), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S108). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display device performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, jackpot B or jackpot C is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), 4 is set to the probability changing counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S212).

  Next, it is determined what kind of jackpot type out of the big jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) of three types of special symbols (S213). 20 is set in the middle counter 203f (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 50 is set in the hour / short counter 203f (S215), and if the jackpot type is jackpot C, 100 is set in the hour / counter counter 203f (S216). Then, a special symbol jackpot start is set (S217), and the process is terminated. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S217, if the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the fanfare command is set. Is done. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly set, the short time period of the normal symbol (the duration of the “short time state of the normal symbol”) is set according to the jackpot type of the new special symbol. . Therefore, if the special symbol jackpot is newly won during the continuation of the “normal symbol short-time state”, the short-term period of the normal symbol after the jackpot of the new special symbol is set according to the new jackpot type. Therefore, the short time period of the normal symbol remaining until the new jackpot is invalidated. For example, when the special symbol jackpot C is reached and the “normal symbol normal state” shifts to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the “big jackpot C” ends. Will continue until. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period of the normal symbol until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal state of normal symbol”, the special symbol lottery will be held 20 times after the end of the “big jackpot A” It will continue until it ends. Therefore, when the short time period of normal symbols has been “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times” is given to the player. I will give it. As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, a short time period display is performed in the ending effect, and the player may be notified of the short time period of the normal symbol. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  In addition, if a special symbol is a big hit and the special symbol is in a high probability state, it is likely to be a special symbol big hit. Is likely to be. Therefore, while shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol, it is easy to give the player the impression that the short time period has been shortened.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state and a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. When the jackpot effect ends (the ending effect described later is performed), is the confirmed effect display notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes? Alternatively, a short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” being executed is performed. In the present embodiment, when performing the ending effect, the “definite effect display” is displayed based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize. Appropriate selection is made as to whether or not the “short time display” is performed, so that the player is given the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened as much as possible (see FIG. 32). That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more (S218), and the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S218: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability changing counter 203e (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S220). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S221), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability changing counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, so the probability changing success / failure determination execution flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the processing of S304 is performed. Transition. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the fact that the special symbol variation start process has performed the lottery (decision determination) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is the same. This is a process executed in the timer interruption process, and can be notified to the start winning process performed after the special symbol variation start process. Then, in the start winning process, when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is referred to. If the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, a special symbol is displayed. The pre-reading of the lottery result in can be skipped and not executed.

  Note that, at the stage where the execution of the special symbol variation start process is started, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is always reset to OFF by the start winning process (see FIG. 20) performed after the special symbol variation start process. (S415 in FIG. 20), the certainty change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is always kept off. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the process branches to S302: No, so that the process of S303 is not executed, and the probability change execution determination flag 203h is kept off. Therefore, in this case, even if the special symbol lottery is performed, if the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the start winning process, the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read.

  The special symbol lottery performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state is obtained by using the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a for high probability. Since it is performed by comparing one by one with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table, if a matching value is not found, the time required for the processing becomes long. Further, when a matching value is not found and the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is used as a random number value stored in the stop type selection table as a process for determining the stop type at the time of release. Since the process of comparing with is performed, it takes more time for the process. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to a random number value that becomes a “rear and forward outreach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred, After the occurrence, a process is performed to compare the random number value that becomes “reach other than front / rear out” that stops when the final stop symbol is not before or after the reach symbol, or the random value that becomes “completely out” without reach.

  Therefore, in one timer interruption process, in the special symbol that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery that is executed in accordance with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 If the lottery result prefetching is executed together, the processing time will exceed the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt process being executed will be executed. There is a possibility that it cannot be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, in the start winning process, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is ON, the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped and is not executed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interruption process.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interruption process is a start winning process (see FIG. 17) for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol. 17 (see S106 of FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not a special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol change state before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. . Therefore, the special symbol lottery, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably given priority in the timer interrupt process.

  In the timer interrupt process, the special symbol variation process may be performed after the start winning process. In this case, before the start winning process, a process for determining whether or not a special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol variation process is performed, the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, and the special symbol is changed. When the special symbol lottery is performed in the variation process, the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol may not be executed in the start winning process.

  In addition, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read in the start winning process, the special symbol lottery performed in the special symbol variation process is delayed so that it can be performed in the next timer interruption process. May be. This also prevents the special symbol lottery and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being performed simultaneously in one timer interruption process.

  In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation counter 203e is 0 in the process of S302 (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 is the value of the first pachinko machine 10 in the normal state of the special symbol. Then, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. It is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big jackpots (jackpots A, Among the jackpots B and jackpots C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  In the processing of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are stipulated. Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S308 or S310 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, the start winning information process (S106) will be described first, and then the delay prefetching process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S106). This start winning process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change determination flag 203h is ON (S407). If the probability change execution determination flag 203h is off (S407: No), it is special when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state in the special symbol change process executed before the current start winning process. Since the symbol lottery is not performed, the processing of S408 to S413 is executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol.

  When the probability change during-progress determination execution flag 203c is OFF, it indicates that a special symbol lottery is not performed in the special symbol variation process executed before the current start winning process, or the pachinko machine 10 When the special symbol is in the normal state, it indicates that the special symbol has been drawn. Therefore, even if the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, there is no possibility that the time taken for the timer interrupt process being executed will exceed the execution interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not performed, or when the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the start winning process is performed to the first entrance 64. If a winning of a ball is detected, it is possible to surely prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. Therefore, since it can suppress that the opportunity for the prefetch of the lottery result in a special symbol to be reduced, it can suppress that the opportunity of an interest improvement with respect to a player decreases.

  In the process of S408, based on the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g in the RAM 203 and the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol (whether or not a big hit) and its stop type (big hit) In this case, the jackpot type) and its fluctuation pattern are predicted (S408). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the special symbol big hit random number for high probability. It is determined by comparing each of 30 random values (winning values) stored in a table (not shown). As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the special symbol big hit random number table (low probability) Judgment is made by comparing each of three random values (winning values) stored in each (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the first random number counter C1 value, Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 and the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table is compared, Among the three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. The stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, based on a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). It will be selected accordingly. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S408 predicts whether or not the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S409).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a. Then, it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  After the winning information command is set by the process of S409, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted by the process of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S410). If the lottery result predicted in the process of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S410: Yes), 4 is set in the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (S411), and the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, when the lottery result predicted in the process of S408 is out of the special symbol (S410: No), it is determined whether the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more (S412), and the prefetching probability changing counter 203g If it is 1 or more (S412: Yes), the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S413), and the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, in the process of S407, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is off (S407: No), pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol (the processes of S408 to S413) is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S407, when the probability change determination flag 203c is on (S407: Yes), the prefetch delay flag 203i is set on (S414), and the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203c is on, the special symbol is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol in the variation process executed before the current start winning process. Indicates that a lottery is being held. That is, in the MPU 201, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability are used. A process of comparing one by one or comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with a random value that becomes “front / rear out of reach”, etc., is performed when the special symbol is off, which takes a long time. ing.

  In such a situation, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained by entering the first entrance 64 is stored in the special symbol big random number table. It is the same as the lottery of special symbols, such as comparing the random number value with the random number value, or comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value that becomes “out-of-front reach”, etc. Since the process is repeated, this process also requires a lot of processing time. Therefore, those processing times exceeded the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (for example, 2 milliseconds), and there is a possibility that the timer interrupt process being executed cannot be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. .

  On the other hand, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, skipping the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol and not executing it will result in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variation state. It is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interrupt process. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interrupt is based on the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol. Also done before. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not a special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol change state before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. . In addition, prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be easily and reliably not executed. Therefore, the special symbol lottery, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably given priority in the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the special symbol variation process can be performed after the start winning process in the timer interruption process. In this case, before the start winning process, a process for determining whether or not a special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol variation process is performed, the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, and the special symbol is changed. When the special symbol lottery is performed in the variation process, pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is not executed in the start winning process. In addition, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read in the start winning process, the special symbol lottery performed in the special symbol variation process is delayed so that it can be performed in the next timer interruption process. May be. This also prevents the special symbol lottery and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being performed simultaneously in one timer interruption process.

  In addition, when the next timer interrupt process is executed by turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i by the process of S414, the various types stored in the process of S406 in the delay prefetch process (see S105 in FIG. 17). Based on the value of the counter, the lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probabilistic state, the special symbol, which is the most important process, can be surely performed in one timer interruption process, and the lottery result in the special symbol can be obtained. Can be read by the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a decrease in the chances of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process. In this case, the winning to the first entrance 64 is not detected in the next timer interruption process. Therefore, the start winning is not detected in both of the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous. Similarly, since the variation effect executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variable effect is performed, the next timer In the interruption process, a special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the changing effect is never generated. Therefore, in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the variation effect that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is not started. Therefore, when prefetching the lottery result for a special symbol in the next timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process does not exceed the execution interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. . Therefore, prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be surely performed in the next timer interruption process, and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be performed without causing a large delay. In the process of S415, the correct / incorrect change determination execution flag 203h is turned off (S415), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the delay prefetching process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the delay prefetch process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). This delay prefetching process prefetches the lottery result in a special symbol when the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on in the previously executed timer interrupt process.

  In this delay prefetching process, it is first determined whether or not the prefetch delay flag 203i is on (S501). If the prefetch delay flag 203i is off (S501: No), nothing is done, that is, special This process is terminated without prefetching the lottery result for the symbol. On the other hand, when the prefetch delay flag 203i is on (S501: Yes), the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned off (S502), and the subsequent processes of S503 to S509 are executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. .

  In the process of S503, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are read (S503). Here, as described above, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process. This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the special symbol lottery is performed. Further, since the detection of the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is performed over the three timer interruption processes as described above, the first entrance 64 in the previous timer interrupt process. If a winning of a ball is detected, a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is never detected in this timer interruption process. Therefore, the values of the various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the end are acquired and stored based on the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 in the previous timer interruption process. Will be.

  The various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the end are specified based on the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. That is, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, various counters stored in the reserved first area are specified as various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, various counters stored in the reserved second area are stored in the reserved third area when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 3. When the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 4, the various counters stored in the reserved fourth area are specified as the last counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Next, on the basis of the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g in the RAM 203 and various counter values read out in the process of S503, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol and its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) Then, the fluctuation pattern is predicted (S504). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 read in the processing of S503 and the special symbol big hit for a high probability. This is determined by comparing one by one with 30 random values (winning values) stored in a random number table (not shown). As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 read in the processing of S503 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. This is determined by comparing one by one with three random values (winning values) stored in (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the first random number counter C1 value, Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 read in the processing of S503 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. Among the three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the special symbol, the stop symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 read out in the process of S503 is out of front and back. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than forward / backward deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 read in the process of S503 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability changing counter 203e is 0, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined from the variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. It is selected according to. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table in accordance with the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S504 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S505). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the lottery result in the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and each piece of information is used as winning information. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a and it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  After the winning information command is set in the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is a special symbol jackpot (S506). When the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is a special symbol jackpot (S506: Yes), 4 is set in the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (S507), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is out of the special symbol (S506: No), it is determined whether the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more (S508), and the prefetching probability changing counter 203g. Is 1 or more (S508: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S509), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the process of S509 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the prefetch delay flag 203i is on when the delay prefetch process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the lottery result of the special symbol skipped in the previous timer interrupt process is displayed. Prefetching can be performed. That is, the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read based on the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. be able to.

  Here, as described above, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process. This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol during the timer interruption processing being executed, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) processing is performed. Thus, when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, and the lottery result in the special symbol is not prefetched and skipped.

  However, since the prefetch delay flag 203i is referred to when the next timer interrupt process is executed, it is easy and reliable that the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol was not performed in the previous timer interrupt process. The lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read based on the values of the various counters acquired with the winnings detected in the previous timer interruption process. Therefore, even if the lottery result in the special symbol is not pre-read in the previous timer interrupt process, it is acquired with the winning detected in the previous timer interrupt process in the next timer interrupt process. Based on the values of the various counters, the lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read.

  Therefore, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be surely performed in the previous timer interrupt process, and the previous timer interrupt is performed. If prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped during the process, the prefetching can be performed in the next timer interrupt process, so the chance of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is reduced. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player. Further, in this case, in the next timer interruption process in which the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, so the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, This can be done without causing a large delay.

  As described above, since the variation effect is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery is performed at the start of the variation effect, the next timer interruption process absolutely does the variation effect. There will be no special symbol drawing at the start. Further, in this embodiment, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process. In this case, the winning to the first entrance 64 is not detected in the next timer interruption process. Therefore, when prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed because the prefetch delay flag 203i is on, the special symbol lottery associated with the start of the variation effect is performed in the timer interruption process. With the winning of a new ball to the ball opening 64, the lottery result in the special symbol is not prefetched.

  Therefore, there is no need to further delay the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol, such as waiting for prefetching after turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i until a plurality of timer interruption processes are executed. Therefore, in one timer interrupt process, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state, a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is performed, and the special timer lottery for which the special symbol lottery has been performed is performed. When a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the insertion process, the lottery result for the special symbol may be pre-read in the next timer interruption process.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S107). This normal symbol variation process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time-shortage counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623).
In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. If the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory will be performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S108). This through gate passing process (S108) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) or the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process or the delay prefetch process (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the fanfare command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 19). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S621, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) S217 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), a fanfare command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, a fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1107, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1108), and this processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all five rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1109, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1109 (S1109: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 29). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, the variable display setting process is executed (S1311). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 ends, the continuous notice determination counter 223g used for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect is updated (S1313). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is read from the RAM 223, and 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 223g.

  Next, the ending mode counter 223e used for selecting the display mode of the ending effect is updated (S1314). Specifically, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is read from the RAM 223, and 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (3 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the ending mode counter 223e is stored in the ending mode counter 223e.

  When the processing of S1314 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown flag are turned on (S1317), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The fluctuation display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). If a winning information command is received (S1409: Yes), a continuous notice determination process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous notice determination process, various types of information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching in the main controller 110 are extracted as winning information from the received winning information command, and the extracted winning information is won in the RAM 233. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, the variation effect held at that time is To determine whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1409 (S1409: No), it is next determined whether or not a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When a fanfare command is received (S1411: Yes), a display fanfare command is set (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. The display fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1413). When the round number command is received (S1413: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1414), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1415), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1413 (S1413: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1416). If an ending command is received (S1416: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S1417), and this process ends. In the ending setting process, the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the special game state being executed and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and the display according to the determination Ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1416 (S1416: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1418). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the continuous notice determination process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination process (S1410). This continuous notice determination process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 30). When received, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect.

  In this continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and any condition is satisfied. If so, it is next determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. If it is determined here that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the continuous notice effect is started. S1503 to S1511 to be described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1512 to S1517 to be described later start a continuous notice effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to do so.

  Note that (Condition 1) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) becomes “special symbol jackpot” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed, Between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the newly received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, two or more variation effects (holding ball) (That is, the difference between the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 3 or more), and (Condition 3) means that all the set continuous notice effects are set. When the game is completed, the special symbol is lost, and the success / failure included in the newly received winning information command is the special symbol jackpot.

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) are extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1501). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various types of information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When pre-reading is completed in main controller 110, a winning information command including various information obtained by pre-reading is transmitted from main controller 110 to sound lamp control device 113.

When the processing of S1501 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1501 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1502). In the processing of S1502, the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area is the first area.
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1503). If the winning information extracted is “special symbol jackpot” (S1503). : Yes), the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, if the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1503: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is “front / rear out of reach” ( S1504). In the process of S1504, when the fluctuation pattern of the extracted winning information is “front / rear out of reach” (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the extracted winning information is not “front / rear out of reach” but other fluctuation patterns (S1504: No), this process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1505, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1505), and then the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is substituted for the variable B (S1506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223h) is 0 (S1507). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1507: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed. Since it is not set and satisfies the above (Condition 1), the process proceeds to S1512, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the process after S1512.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223h) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1507: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (S1508). As described above, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, the game state after the change effect is “special” after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is OFF, after the variable effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. This indicates that the game state of the game will be in the state of “excluding special symbols”.

  Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (S1508: Yes), when all the set continuous notice effects are finished, the “special symbol jackpot” is obtained. That is, the difference between the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted into the variable C (S1509). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1510), and as a result, if the variable C is 3 or more (S1510: Yes), the variable effect corresponding to the received winning information command ( It can be determined that there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between the “holding ball” and the last fluctuating effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set. Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1507, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1510 that the above (Condition 2) is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1512, and the continuous notice effect is started by the processing after S1512. Decide whether or not to do.

  On the other hand, if the variable C is not 3 or more (ie, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information is continuously present at the present time. Since there are no two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1507, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1510 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  In the processing of S1508, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is on (S1508: Yes), it will be a “special symbol jackpot” when all the set continuous notice effects have ended. Due to the “special symbol jackpot”, the player's expectation by the continuous notice effect is temporarily interrupted. However, if (Condition 2) is satisfied, that is, the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the meantime, if there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls), it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, the chance symbol is always displayed as a stop symbol in two or more variable effects performed after the “special symbol jackpot”. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous notice effect, or to enhance the sense of expectation that the player feels about the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1508, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is OFF (S1508: No), it becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. Therefore, it is further determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is “special symbol jackpot” (S1511). Then, if the winning / exclusion of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1511: Yes), the winning / losing included in the newly received winning information command is “special symbol jackpot”. From the results of the processing, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1511, it can be determined that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1512, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the processes after S1512.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1511, if the winning / exclusion of the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1511: No), the result of the process of S1507, the process of S1508, and the process of S1511 is described above. It can be determined that none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect. Here, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1508: No), it becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the success / failure included in the newly received prize information command is “special symbol jackpot”. It is possible to prevent the notice effect from ending and becoming “special symbol detachment”, and then continuing to the notice effect and performing “special symbol detachment” again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the state of “exclusion of special symbol” continuously after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the special notice comes off after the end of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect is continued, the player can have a strong expectation of being a special feature jackpot. Can be motivated to continue playing games.

  As described above, in the processes of S1505 to S1511, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, if none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the process after S1512 for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is not executed, and therefore the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect is performed reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. Moreover, since the processing after S1512 is omitted, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load in the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S1512 to S1514, it is used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect from the two continuous notice determination tables 222a (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing). The continuous notice determination table (see FIG. 9) to be selected is selected.

  First, in the process of S1512, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the process of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1512). If the winning information of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1512: Yes), the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect. (S1513). On the other hand, if the winning information of the extracted winning information is “out of special symbol” (S1512: No), the consecutive notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as the successive notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect. (S1514).

  If the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1512 to S1514, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is acquired (S1515). Then, the continuous notice determination table selected in the process of S1513 or the process of S1514 (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing) and the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b ( The continuous notice determination range is specified based on the number N) of the variable display hold in the special symbol, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 223g (S1516).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range, and it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is started (S1517). In the process of S1517, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1517: No), the process after S1518 is skipped, and the command determination process is performed. Return to. That is, the setting of the continuous notice counter 223h is held as it is. Therefore, when there is a holding ball set to perform a fluctuating effect notice, a continuous notice effect is performed for the reserved ball, and when such a reserved ball does not exist, a continuous notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1517, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is to be started (S1517: Yes), the number of special symbol holding balls in the continuous notice number counter 223h. The value of the counter 223b is set (S1518). Here, by setting the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h by the processing of S1518, the variation effect held before the variation effect corresponding to the winning information command received this time is set. Execution of continuous notice effect is set for all. In other words, chances can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuating effects corresponding to the reserved balls held before the reserved balls corresponding to the winning information command received this time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1519). If the winning information of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1519: Yes), the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to ON (S1520), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning / extraction information of the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1519: No), the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is set to OFF (S1521), and this process is terminated.

  If all the set continuous notice effects set by the process of S1520 or the process of S1521 are finished, it will be determined whether the “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol miss” will result in a post-notice jackpot flag 223i. Can be set to Thereby, when the continuous notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1508 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is used by using the value of the post-notice big hit flag 223i set here. It can be determined whether or not the above is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ending setting process (S1417) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1417). This ending setting process (S1417) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1417 in FIG. 30). When an ending command is received, an ending effect is obtained. This is a process for determining the display mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 determines “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 may play a special game after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is completed. At the same time, the big symbol effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare effect is first performed, and then the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all five rounds) is finished, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. In this embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, or that is being executed A short time display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made while the “ordinary symbol time-short state” is continued, each time according to the jackpot type of the new special symbol. Because the short-term period (the duration of the “normal symbol short-time state”) is updated, if a special jackpot is newly won during the “normal symbol short-time state” duration, it will remain until the new jackpot is reached. The short time period of the normal symbol that was used becomes invalid. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal symbol normal state”, the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the “big jackpot A” ends. Will continue until. Therefore, when the short time period is “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, it gives the player the impression that it has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”. . As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, a short time period display is performed in the ending effect, and the player may be notified of the short time period of the normal symbol. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  Furthermore, when the special symbol is a big win and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the big jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the big jackpot ends) Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  Therefore, in this ending setting process, when performing the ending effect, based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, It is determined whether to perform “display” or “display for a short period of time”, so as not to give the player the impression that the short period of normal symbols has been shortened as much as possible. That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot A” based on the starting information of “No jackpot C”, the “Ending effect display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big jackpot C”. Do.

  As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are held, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the start information in the middle, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but this special symbol The ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time, when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of You may comprise so that "short-term display" may not be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player feels lost of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In addition, in this ending setting process, in order to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, there is a start prize that becomes a “special jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and this special symbol If the jackpot type is “Big Jack A” and the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, "Period display". In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the starting information in the inside, “short-term display” is performed in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” is displayed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot You can go. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short time period display flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). The short time period display flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the short time period display is performed in the ending effect. When this flag is set to ON, the ending is performed so that the short time period display is always performed in the ending effect. An effect display mode is set. In the process of S1601, if the short time period display flag 223f is on (S1601: Yes), the short time period display flag 223f is set to off (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when the short time period display flag 223f is off (S1601: No), all winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233 is acquired. (S1602), it is determined whether or not the acquired winning information includes winning information whose winning / missing is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603).

  In the present embodiment, the ending setting process is executed immediately before performing the ending effect. This is because more winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a than when the special symbol lottery result is determined to be a big win or when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state (5R big win). This is because there is a high possibility. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, when the player hits the special winning opening 65a in the special gaming state, Many balls enter the mouth 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  Therefore, it is better to wait until the end of the ending effect that is executed at the timing when the special gaming state ends than to acquire the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in advance. There is a high possibility that more winning information can be acquired from the storage area 223a. Therefore, in the process of S1603, it is possible to increase the possibility that it is determined that there is winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot”. That is, since the possibility of branching to S1603: Yes can be increased, based on the processing of S1604 to S1611 described later, the ending display mode is set to “determined effect display” or the ending display mode is set to “ Opportunities for controlling whether to set “short time display” can be increased. Therefore, as described above, the player can be dissatisfied and the player can be prevented from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed and the player can continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that a higher added value game value has been obtained, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, regardless of the jackpot type, it becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5R jackpot). After that, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot ends. Until the lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (during the special symbol probable change period). And while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), the special number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls is reached. Until the symbol lottery ends, the state of special symbol change (during the special symbol change period) is maintained.

  While the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change period of a special symbol, it is easy to win a special symbol, so there is a high possibility that the next special symbol will be won immediately after the special symbol is hit. Also, during the probable period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state (during the special symbol's short-term period) Even if it is during a short period of time for normal symbols, it is difficult for the player to leave an impression that a game has been played using that short period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. There is a risk of feeling that a short time period has been set. In particular, when the newly set short time is shorter than the short time period of the previous regular symbol, the player feels dissatisfied and the player loses a sense of lost game value. There is a risk that the player's willingness to participate will be reduced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, after winning the special symbol jackpot, the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect as shown in the processing of S1602. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times), so the special game state is ended. If the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect executed at the timing, four winning information can be acquired in most cases. The winning information acquired here indicates the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result that is likely to be a big win of the special symbol) during the special symbol probability change period. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine whether another special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it becomes a big hit of another special symbol during the probability change period of the special symbol, and the short time period of the new normal symbol is used even though the conventional short time period of the normal symbol is hardly used or not used at all. The period is set, and in addition, the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, which makes the player feel dissatisfied and the game value given It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the player feels lost. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game as much as possible, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game as much as possible.

  In the processing of S1603, when there is no winning information whose winning / failing is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603: No), the processing proceeds to S1614. On the other hand, if there is a winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603: Yes), the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” jackpot type has three types of special symbol jackpot (jackpot) A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is judged whether it is “jackpot C” (S1604).

  In the processing of S1604, when the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed is “jackpot C” (S1604: Yes), after the currently running jackpot ends, the currently pending start It is determined whether or not the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the winning is “jackpot A” (S1605). In the process of S1604, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” that is currently being executed is identified based on the stop classification extracted from the stop classification command transmitted from the main control device 110, for example. Further, based on the winning information stored in the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed may be specified. In the processing of S1605, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is specified based on the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Here, when the processing of S1605 is executed, since it is determined Yes in the processing of S1603, the winning information in which the success or failure is “special symbol jackpot” in the winning information acquired in the processing of S1602. There is at least one. That is, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, there is at least one winning information which becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery performed from the first time to the fourth time. In the processing of S1605, when the “special symbol jackpot” that is currently being executed ends, and the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot A” (S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. Here, when the process of S1612 is executed, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is always performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winning, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”, If the next special symbol jackpot type is “Big Jack A” based on the pending start information, the process proceeds to S1612, and the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is performed. Is done. Therefore, since the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol is not displayed, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of this normal symbol, and then the next special symbol jackpot Thus, even if the “short time period display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the previous short time period with the new short time period. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is finished, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot B” or “ If it is “big hit C” (S1605: No), the process proceeds to S1609. In the process of S1604, if the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is not “jackpot C” (S1604: No), whether the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is “jackpot A”. It is determined whether or not (S1606). In the processing of S1606, when the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is “jackpot A” (S1606: Yes), after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” ends, Based on the pending start information, it is determined whether or not the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is “jackpot C” (S1607). On the other hand, in the processing of S1606, when the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is not “big jackpot A” (that is, “big jackpot B”) (S1606: No), the processing proceeds to S1609. To do.

  In the processing of S1606, for example, based on the stop type extracted from the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110, the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed is specified. Further, based on the winning information stored in the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed may be specified. In the processing of S1607, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is specified based on the winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Here, when the processing of S1607 is executed, since it is determined Yes in the processing of S1603, the winning information whose winning / failing is “special symbol jackpot” is included in the winning information acquired in the processing of S1602. There is at least one. That is, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, there is at least one winning information which becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery performed from the first time to the fourth time.

  In the processing of S1607, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B” "(S1607: No), the process proceeds to S1609. On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot C”. In this case (S1607: Yes), the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1614. Here, when the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON, when the ending setting process is executed in association with the next “special symbol jackpot”, the process branches to No in the process of S1601 and proceeds to the process of S1614. The display mode of the ending effect corresponding to the next jackpot effect is always set to the short time display.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “big jackpot C” based on the pending start information, the process branches to S1607: Yes, and the hourly number display flag 223f is set on, and then in S1614 The process transitions to the process, and the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “short time display” is always performed. After that, when the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is performed, since the time reduction display flag 223f is set to ON, the process proceeds to the processing of S1614, and "time reduction display" is always performed. Thus, the display mode of the ending effect is set. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot, the “short time period display” is performed, respectively. The player can recognize a new short time period of normal symbols.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the processing of S1609, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is acquired (S1609), and the acquired counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1610). If the acquired counter value is included in the range in which execution of the confirmed effect display is selected and it is determined that the confirmed effect display is executed (S1611: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. In the process of S1612, the definite effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1612), and the process proceeds to S1615.

  In the process of S1611, when the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting execution of the short time period display and it is determined that the short time period display is to be executed (S1611: No), the process proceeds to S1614. In the process of S1614, a short time period display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1615.

  In the process of S1615, based on the display mode set by the process of S1612 or the process of S1614, a display ending command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Therefore, the setting is made (S1615). By receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 is controlled so that the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1311). This variable display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1708 is a stop type corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” (S1709). When the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “exclusion of special symbol” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1712), the process proceeds to S1713. By this processing of S1712, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left Set to “3”, “4”, “1”) in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), when the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (in the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1713.

  If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1711, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, the chance type is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice number is set. Similarly to the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main controller 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1713, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1713). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice number counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1904), and then the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 34). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 45A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 36B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 16) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 36B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is handled. A stop type table is determined (S2401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2403, stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command (S2404: Yes), if the stop type is a jackpot stop type (S2404: Yes), the normal image transfer setting process starts transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect when it is on. The fanfare data transfer flag 223i notified to (S3303) is set to ON (S2405), this stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on this fanfare data transfer flag 223i, image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the large effect change effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  The display fanfare command for instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed, so that the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the change effect until the fanfare effect is started, and the player can operate. There was a risk of anxiety about whether it was stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device In 81, control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is completed before the fluctuating effect that is a big hit is completed. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2208: Yes), the fanfare command processing is executed (S2209), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command process is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the fanfare effect until the start of the round effect. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for five rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time until the jackpot variation display is finished in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2208 that there is no display fanfare command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display If there is an ending command (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2212 that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216). If (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 38 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 38A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the same process as the display setting process is performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 11B and 11C) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 36B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 42 to 44) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 37). As a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is changed. This means that it is determined that the jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), after setting the fanfare data transfer flag to off (S3510), the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the top address (storage source top address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  In the process of S3509, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but off (S3509: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 determines “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 is finished after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is finished. Shifts to the special gaming state, and the big symbol effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare effect is first performed, and then the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all five rounds) is finished, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. Then, when this ending effect is performed, either a confirmed effect display that informs that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize or a “special symbol that is being executed” A short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to “big jackpot” is performed.

  In addition, as described above, while the “ordinary symbol time-saving state” is continued, each time a new special symbol jackpot is reached, each time a short-term period (“ The regular symbol “short-time state” duration) is updated, so if the special symbol jackpot is newly added during the “normal symbol short-time state” duration, the normal symbol that was left before the new jackpot The short time period becomes invalid. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal symbol normal state”, the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the “big jackpot A” ends. Will continue until.

  As described above, the conventional pachinko machine or the present pachinko machine 10 may display a short time period in the ending effect and notify the player of the short time period of the normal symbol. In conventional pachinko machines, this notification may notify the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, and in this case, the player can easily compare the short time period It can be carried out. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened, and there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced. For example, when the short time period is “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, it gives the player the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”. . As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Furthermore, when the special symbol is a big win and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the big jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the big jackpot ends) Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, as described in the ending setting process (see FIG. 32), when performing the ending effect, the special symbol jackpot type of this time or “special” Based on the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot, decide whether to perform “definite effect display” or “short-time display”, and give the player the impression that the short-term period of the normal symbol has been shortened as much as possible I am trying not to. That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot A” based on the starting information of “No jackpot C”, the “Ending effect display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big jackpot C”. Do. As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most, so that the player feels dissatisfied strongly or the player feels the sense of loss of the assigned game value. It is possible to suppress the strong holding. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” as in the pachinko machine 10 can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. . That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In this pachinko machine 10, there is a start prize that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”. When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the pending start information, the “Definite Play Display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”. Ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol when the short-term period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short-term period of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the symbol, and In addition, at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot may be configured not to perform the “short-term display”. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player feels lost of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described in the ending setting process (see FIG. 32), in order to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, “special symbol jackpot” is included in the pending start prize. And the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “Big jackpot A” and the special jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot C” based on the pending startup information. Performs “short-term display” in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot. In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, there is a start prize that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prizes, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Bonus C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot, but this special symbol When the short-term duration of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot type is longer than the short-term duration of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot May be performed. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the ending setting process (see FIG. 32) immediately before performing the ending effect. This is because more winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a than when the special symbol lottery result is determined to be a big win or when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state (5R big win). This is because there is a high possibility. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, when the player hits the special winning opening 65a in the special gaming state, Many balls enter the mouth 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  Therefore, it is better to wait until the end of the ending effect that is executed at the timing when the special gaming state ends than to acquire the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in advance. There is a high possibility that more winning information can be acquired from the storage area 223a. Therefore, in the process of S1603, it is possible to increase the possibility that it is determined that there is winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot”. That is, since the possibility of branching to S1603: Yes can be increased, the ending display mode is set to “determined effect display” or the ending display mode is set to “based on the processing of S1604 to S1611 described above. Opportunities for controlling whether to set “short time display” can be increased. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied, or to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value. It can be suppressed and the player can continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that a higher added value game value has been obtained, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10, when the big win of the special symbol, regardless of the type of jackpot, it becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5R jackpot), and then, as added value after the jackpot ends, From the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change period). And while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), the special number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls is reached. Until the symbol lottery ends, the state of special symbol change (during the special symbol change period) is maintained.

  In the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit during the probability change period of the special symbol. Is likely to be. Also, during the probable period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state (during the special symbol's short-term period) Even if it is during a short period of time for normal symbols, it is difficult for the player to leave an impression that a game has been played using that short period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. There is a risk of feeling that a short time period has been set. With conventional pachinko machines, when the newly set short time is shorter than the previous short time period of normal symbols, the player may feel dissatisfied or lose the sense of lost gaming value. May be held by the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, after winning the special symbol jackpot, as shown in the processing of S1602, after waiting until the start of the ending effect, the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a. . As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times), so the special game state is ended. If the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect executed at the timing, four winning information can be acquired in most cases. The winning information acquired here indicates the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result that is likely to be a big win of the special symbol) during the special symbol probability change period. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine whether another special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it becomes a big hit of another special symbol during the probability change period of the special symbol, and the short time period of the new normal symbol is used even though the conventional short time period of the normal symbol is hardly used or not used at all. The period is set, and in addition, the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, which makes the player feel dissatisfied and the game value given It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the player feels lost. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game as much as possible, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game as much as possible.

  In addition, the short time period (for example, “20 chances”) of the normal symbol displayed in the “short time period display” of the above embodiment corresponds to the “period information” described in the claims, and the above embodiment. Display content (for example, “Super Chance!”) Corresponds to “other information” described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired by the main control device 110, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) is pre-read (predicted), and the pre-read Is received from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, various information obtained by prefetching may be included in the reserved ball number command and transmitted without transmitting the winning information command. With such a configuration, the number of reserved balls and various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) are included in the reserved ball number command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, the correspondence between the number of held balls and various types of information becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of held balls and various information is always accurate without paying attention to the timing of receiving commands, the number of held balls and various information from the RAM. Can be performed accurately.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the 3rd symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and as a result, the 3rd symbol display device 81 The variation effect according to the variation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the variation effect ends, the stop type stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing stop display of a stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the scheduled execution time of the variable effect is set. You may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued even if it complete | finishes.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the normal symbol time-saving state is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times. ”Will continue until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times after the end of the“ big hit B ”, and when the“ big hit C ”is reached, the special symbol lottery will be started after the“ big hit C ”ends. The time-short state of the normal symbol is continued until 100 times are finished, but the duration of the time-short state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed 60 times, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of the high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the 1st entrance 64 will be opened only "1 second x 2 times", What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the pending start-up information, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. , Corresponding to the special symbol jackpot when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot type is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the special symbol this time At least one of the ending effect and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is configured not to display “short-term display”. It may be. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, the short time period of the new normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, and the player can hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. When not performing the “short time display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short time length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the pending start-up information, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. Ending effect corresponding to this special symbol jackpot when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot this time In this case, the “short time display” may not be performed. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the short time period of the normal symbol is not displayed, so even if the next special symbol is a big jackpot and the “short time period display” is performed in that ending effect The player cannot easily compare the conventional short time period of the normal symbol and the new normal symbol short time period. Therefore, the new short time period of the normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period, making it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or lost feeling of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. In addition, since the “short-term display” is not performed in the ending production performed earlier, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the longer time-short period, and from the longer time-short period, Can distract consciousness. Therefore, in the next ending effect, when “short time period display” is performed and the player recognizes the shorter time period, it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the shorter time period. Accordingly, since the current short time period may be shorter than the previous short time period, the player's consciousness can be diverted, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are put on hold, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the starting information, the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but the pending start winning prize If there is a start winning prize that will be a “special design jackpot”, and if the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol, and next time It may be configured so that “short-time display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. In particular, the special symbol jackpot C is set so that the short time period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter, the player will not be able to easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied or having the player lose a sense of lost game value. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game more continuously. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are put on hold, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the starting information, the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but the pending start winning prize If there is a start-up prize that will be a “special design jackpot”, and if the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, in the ending production corresponding to this special symbol jackpot, You may comprise so that "period display" may not be performed. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, in the ending production corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the “short time period display” is not performed, so the player can compare the short time period of the conventional normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Is not easily recognized. In particular, the special symbol jackpot C is set so that the short time period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter, the player will not be able to easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied or having the player lose a sense of lost game value. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game more continuously. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot, the “short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending effect You may comprise as follows. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot, the “short time period display” is performed, respectively. Then, the player can recognize the short time period of the newly set normal symbol. Therefore, since the player can easily compare the normal symbol time and short-term, the short time period of the new normal symbol is longer than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, and the short time period of the normal symbol is extended. The player can be given the impression that Accordingly, the player can be given an impression that a game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. Ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol, when the short period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special jackpot is longer than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, and You may comprise so that "display for a short time period" may be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. For example, if “short-duration display” is performed in the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol this time, and “short-duration display” is not performed in the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol, this normal symbol Only the short time period is notified, and the next short time period of the normal symbol is not notified. In this case, since the player can recognize only the short time period of the current normal symbol, even after the new short time period is set, the player pays attention to the short time period of the current normal symbol. However, the newly set normal symbol time-short period is longer than the conventional normal symbol time-short period, so after the new normal symbol time-short period has been set, the player is paying more attention to the short-time period. It will be longer and shorter. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended and the game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. Correspond to the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is longer than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol In the ending production, “Short-term display” is performed. It may be configured so as not to perform the "time-shortening period Display" in the production. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, only the short time period of the current normal symbol is notified, and the short time period of the next normal symbol is not notified. Therefore, since the player can recognize only the short time period of the current normal symbol, even after a new short time period is set, the player pays attention to the short time period of the current normal symbol. However, the newly set normal symbol time-short period is longer than the conventional normal symbol time-short period, so after the new normal symbol time-short period has been set, the player is paying more attention to the short-time period. It will be longer and shorter. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended and the game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. In addition, after the player recognizes that the short time period of the normal symbol is extended, the player does not know how long the extension will continue, so that the player can be delighted and can increase the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. If the jackpot type of the special symbol is “Big Jack A”, the “Ending effect” corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol will be displayed in the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol this time. It may be configured so that the “short-time display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, only the short time period of the current normal symbol is notified, and the short time period of the next normal symbol is not notified. “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest period for regular symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, so if the next special symbol is a big hit, the regular symbol hourly period Is likely to be set longer (for example, 50 times or 100 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol is set longer, it is possible to notify only the short time period of the current normal symbol and not to notify the short time period of the next normal symbol. Therefore, the player performs the game while expecting that the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is longer than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, so the player is newly set. You will be anxious about the short time period of normal symbols. In addition, after the player recognizes that the newly set normal symbol has a shorter time period than the normal symbol's previous short time period, and the normal symbol has a shorter time period, Players will be glad because they don't know how long the extension will last. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time and the next jackpot type of the “special jackpot of special symbol” in the pending start winning prize, “Determined effect display” or “Short-term display” is selected, but instead of the special symbol jackpot type and the last ending effect, the final effect display (or short-term period) Display), and based on the last special jackpot type of the special symbol, the final special jackpot display in the last ending production, and the special jackpot type of the current special symbol, Or “short-term display” may be selected. Specifically, if the jackpot type of the previous special symbol is “jackpot C” and the time-short display is performed in the previous ending effect, the “determined effect display” is performed in the current ending effect. If configured in this way, the short time period of the normal symbol of this time is not notified, so even if the short time display was performed in the previous ending effect, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol The player cannot easily compare with the period. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, if the jackpot type of the last special symbol is “Big Jack A” and the time-short display is performed in the previous ending effect, “time-short display” is performed in the current ending effect. If configured in this way, both the previous ending performance and the current ending performance will be displayed with a shorter number of times, so the comparison between the conventional short time period of the normal symbol and the new normal symbol short time period Can be performed by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been greatly extended, it is possible to give the player the impression that a higher added value gaming value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the main control device 110 receives a start winning, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning Based on the value, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted, and the various information is given to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Notify. Instead, when the start winning is made in the main controller 110, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in accordance with the start winning are used as they are. The voice lamp control device 113 may be notified by a winning information command. When configured in this manner, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 so that the sound lamp control device 113 can prefetch the lottery result of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) and the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown) for low probability are stored in the sound lamp controller ROM 222, respectively. In addition, among the start winning processes (see FIG. 20) executed in the main controller 110, the processes of S408 to S413 are stored in the ROM 222 so that they can be executed in the audio lamp controller 113, and the pre-reading probability change is further performed. A middle counter 203g is provided in the RAM 223. With this configuration, when a winning information command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the winning information command, and thereafter, S408. The process of S413 can be executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol, so the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further reduced and the transition should be made based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It can concentrate on the lottery process which draws a game state. However, since there is a possibility that important random numbers such as jackpot random numbers may be found illegally, the lottery result (win / fail), stop type, and variation pattern are included in the winning information command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. It is preferable. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main controller 110 from being illegally stolen and analyzing each value of each of the counters C1 to C3. In addition, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, the process which determines whether a continuous notice effect is started (continuous notice determination process of FIG. 31), and the process which determines the display mode of an ending effect (FIG. 32). However, the display control device 114 may execute these processes. In that case, a program for executing each process so that the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 31 and the ending setting process in FIG. 32 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous notice determination table 222a are provided. It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). In addition, in the work RAM 233, the above-described winning information storage area 223a, special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, ending state counter 223e, short time period display flag 223f, continuous notice determination counter 223g, continuous notice number counter 223h, post-notice big hit flag 223i. Each memory is provided. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command to the display control device 114 as it is. When receiving the winning information command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (continuous notice determination processing in FIG. 31). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114 when receiving the ending command from the main control device 110. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining a display mode of the ending effect (ending setting processing in FIG. 32).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 42). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 43) when the above is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the rear image of the super reach that is expected to have a high appearance frequency or a high frequency is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, whereby the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the third symbol display device 81 and Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 receives various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of start winning that is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Although the case where the information is included in the number-of-holding balls command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , Information of the stop type selection counter C3) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 performs a special operation based on various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of winning a winning in the winning information command. Including various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) indicating the symbol lottery result, the winning information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command. Estimate the lottery result of special symbols and the stop type after changing production according to the various information included (whether, stop type, change pattern). In the case where it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect based on the estimation result and the number of held balls held at that time They were bright, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 determines the values of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, first stop type selection counter C3) corresponding to the start-winning from the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning. May be included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 may determine whether to perform the continuous notice effect based on the notified various counter values. Further, main controller 110 may perform the continuous notice effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the fluctuating effect estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the start prize. And at least the determination result is included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 finally performs the continuous notice effect based on the determination result. You may decide. Further, it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 performs the continuous notice effect, and the determination result is included in the winning information command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs the effect of the continuous notice effect. Only the aspect may be determined. As information to be included in the winning information command, information on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the estimated starting winning prize, information on the stop type after the changing effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the continuous notice effect By using the information as to whether or not to perform, the command size of the winning information command can be reduced as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or information on whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command different from the winning information command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1410) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 30), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. In other words, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the embodiment described above, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete out reach) determined by the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been suspended is displayed. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Then, the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1704 in FIG. 33) changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed in the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entrance 64 is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily the case. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases, respectively), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each individual variable effect. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. It may be provided. In the continuous notice determination process, when a continuous notice effect is performed (S1517: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, and the variation pattern of the variable effect that is determined. , A gaming state after the end of a series of continuous notice effects (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, miss), or a combination of two or more thereof. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence is generated. Various flags such as a flag are generated. Based on the flag, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as a warning image is generated. Or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown. Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of the start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random numbers stored in the random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of information, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means The lottery means the lottery means a lot of special periods that are set after the special gaming state is finished and the start condition is easily established. One of the first specifying means specified based on the result, the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means, and the information different from the period information is the first information. Special In order to perform notification by the notifying means in a gaming machine comprising notifying means for informing before a period is started and period setting means for setting the first special period after the special gaming state has ended. The lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the storage information acquisition means And when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, a special period set after the special gaming state ends A second specifying means for specifying one of the plurality of special periods based on the determined lottery result, and a special period specified by the second specifying means. The lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the period comparison means for comparing the second special period to be set next to the first special period and the first special period. If the result of the lottery results in the transition to the special gaming state, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, the notification is made according to the setting of the first special period. In at least one or both of the notification performed by the means and the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period, any one of the period information and other information depending on the predetermined result A gaming machine A1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of them is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit, and the random number stored in the random number information storage unit When one piece of information is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit becomes the lottery result and shifts to the special gaming state in the gaming machine A1, the notification control unit In the comparison result, if the second special period is shorter than the first special period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and the second special period The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the other information is notified at least in one of notifications performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting.

  According to the gaming machine A2, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is shorter than the period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that at least one of the other information is notified. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state in which a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is shorter than the first special period, the first special period And the player cannot easily recognize at least one of the length of the second special period and the length of the second special period. Accordingly, the player can easily make a comparison between the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period, so that a large number of the first special period remains and is newly set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied because the length of the second special period is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notification control unit compares the period when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result. If the second special period is shorter than the first special period in the comparison result of the means, the other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. The game machine A3 is characterized by controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is shorter than the period, the notification unit is controlled by the notification control unit so that other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The Therefore, of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period, in the notification performed earlier, the period information Is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the first special period which is the longer one of the first special period and the second special period. The player's consciousness can be diverted from the period. Therefore, when the player recognizes the second special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period, by the notification that is made later, The special period can be strongly conscious of the player, and the player's consciousness can be diverted because the second special period may be shorter than the first special period. Therefore, it can suppress more that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, and a player can have a willingness to participate in a game more continuously.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison unit, the notification is performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The game machine A4, wherein the notification means is controlled so that other information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A4, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the notification means causes the notification means to notify other information in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Be controlled. When the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the length of the newly set second special period may be shorter than the length of the first special period. is there. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the length of the second special period newly set is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time, the length of the first special period and the second Comparison with the length of the special period can be easily made impossible for the player. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied because the length of the second special period newly set is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can be further encouraged to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison means The gaming machine A5 controls the notification means so that the other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine A5, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the longest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods, the notification unit performs the setting according to the setting of the first special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that other information is notified in the notification. Therefore, although the first special period set first is the longest, a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain, and the newly set second special period is set. When the special period is the shortest, the player cannot easily recognize the length of the first special period, and the player compares the length of the first special period with the length of the second special period. It can be easily disabled. Therefore, a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the length of the second special period is the shortest even though the length of the first special period is the longest. It can be suppressed that the player feels dissatisfied strongly. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from greatly decreasing, it is possible to make the player have more willingness to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the period comparison unit is a special period specified by the second identification unit immediately after the notification by the notification unit, and is next to the first special period. A gaming machine A6, which compares a second special period to be set with the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the second special period that is specified by the second specifying unit and is set next to the first special period immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. The first special period is compared with the period comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison by the period comparison means is performed, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that random number information is stored in the means can be increased, and the possibility that the special period is specified by the second specifying means can be increased. Therefore, since the opportunity for comparison by the period comparison means can be increased, the opportunity for the notification means to be controlled by the notification control means can be increased, and the player has an opportunity to continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. Can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the other information is random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and lottery means for each random number information not acquired by the stored information acquisition means by the lottery means. The game machine A7 is characterized by suggesting that the game state shifts to the special game state in accordance with any lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the other information is the random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and when the lottery means performs lottery for each random number information not acquired by the stored information acquisition means, It is suggested that the game state is shifted to the special game state according to any lottery result. Since the special game state is a state advantageous to the player, if other information which is information suggesting the transition to the special game state is notified by the notification means, it is easy to attract the player's interest in the notification. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period, the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period The player can be made more difficult to recognize, and the player can be made more difficult to compare the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, by notifying other information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to have a willingness to participate in the game.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of the start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random numbers stored in the random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of information, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means The lottery means the lottery means a lot of special periods that are set after the special gaming state is finished and the start condition is easily established. One of the first specifying means specified based on the result, the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means, and the information different from the period information is the first information. Special In order to perform notification by the notifying means in a gaming machine comprising notifying means for informing before a period is started and period setting means for setting the first special period after the special gaming state has ended. The lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the storage information acquisition means And when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, a special period set after the special gaming state ends A second specifying means for specifying one of the plurality of special periods based on the determined lottery result, and a special period specified by the second specifying means. The lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the period comparison means for comparing the second special period to be set next to the first special period and the first special period. If the result of the lottery results in the transition to the special gaming state, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, the notification is made according to the setting of the first special period. In at least one or both of the notification performed by the means and the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period, any one of the period information and other information depending on the predetermined result A gaming machine B1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of them is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit, and the random number stored in the random number information storage unit When one piece of information is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the notification control unit compares the period when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit includes the lottery result and shifts to the special gaming state. If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the means, the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. A gaming machine B2 that controls the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the special period has been extended, and to make the player feel advantageous. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit shifts to the special gaming state due to the lottery result, the notification control unit determines whether the period comparison unit If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result, the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The informing means is controlled, and the informing means is controlled so that the other information is informed in the informing performed by the informing means according to the setting of the second special period. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Is done. Further, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, since the player does not know how long the extension will continue, the player can be relieved. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the transition to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison unit, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period; The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the value information is notified both in accordance with the notification performed by the notifying means in accordance with the setting of the special period of 2.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified in both cases. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is longer than the first special period, the length of the first special period And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period and the player can feel that the special period has been extended, the player can feel that the player has gained an advantage. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison means The value information is reported both in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period. The game machine B5 is characterized by controlling the notification means as described above.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the notification means performs the setting according to the setting of the first special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified both in the notification and in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period. Therefore, the first special period is set when a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain and the first special period is the shortest but the second special period is the longest. And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Accordingly, the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period, and the player can feel that the special period has been extended the most, so that the player can feel more advantageous. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the period comparison unit is a special period specified by the second specification unit immediately after the notification by the notification unit and is subsequent to the first special period. A gaming machine B6, which compares the second special period to be set with the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the second special period that is specified by the second specifying unit and is set next to the first special period immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. The first special period is compared with the period comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison by the period comparison means is performed, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that random number information is stored in the means can be increased, and the possibility that the special period is specified by the second specifying means can be increased. Therefore, since the opportunity for comparison by the period comparison means can be increased, the opportunity for the notification means to be controlled by the notification control means can be increased, and the player has an opportunity to continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. Can be increased.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (notification means)
203a Special symbol reserved ball storage area (random number information storage means)
203f Time / short counter (period setting means)
S213 to S216 First identification means S301 Storage information acquisition means S304, S305 Lottery means S406 Random number information acquisition means S408, S504 Lottery result determination means S1602, S1605, S1607 Second identification means S1602, S1604 to S1607 Period comparison means S1606, S1607, S1614, S1615 Notification control means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with a winning game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect and a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

JP 11-333089 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is a main control unit that performs main control of a game, a sub-control unit that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control unit, and an image based on control by the sub-control unit. Image display means for displaying the image, and the sub-control means includes an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and a plurality of images used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. First image storage means for storing the image information, and a reading operation that is faster than the first image storage means, storing the image information stored in the first image storage means, and storing the image Second image storage means capable of rewriting information, first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from among a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of display types The drawing information for each screen indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed in the display type and the image information necessary for rendering the image of the display type are transferred to the second image storage means. First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information indicating a transfer start timing of power image information, and the first regulation information corresponding to the display type identified by the first display identification means. 1st selection means to select from 1 regulation information storage means, 1st update means to update 1st information every time the image drawing means draws an image for one screen, and the first display A second display specifying means for specifying a second display type for changing and displaying the color tone of at least a part of the image of the display type specified by the specifying means; and a plurality of the second display types. The second In the display type, second specified information indicating drawing information for each screen indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed by changing from the color tone specified by the first specified information corresponding to the display type. Second prescription information storage means for storing, second selection means for selecting the second prescription information corresponding to the second display type specified by the second display specification means from the second prescription information storage means, A second updating unit that updates second information in conjunction with the update of the first updating unit, and the first specified information selected by the first selecting unit each time the first updating unit is updated. Based on the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means, the second specifying means selected by the second selecting means and the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first information. One screen corresponding to the information Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information necessary for the entire image for one screen, and means for specifying drawing information of an image to be displayed after changing from the color tone specified by the first specifying information; Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means; The drawing information specified for each screen in the first specification information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means includes: Based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen from the specifying information included in the drawing information Drawing instruction information is generated, and the image drawing means includes the drawing instruction information out of the image information stored in the second image storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means. The image information indicated by the image instruction information included in the image is used to draw an image for one screen, and the sub-control unit converts the one piece of image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. When used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, a first transfer control means for controlling the transfer of the image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before the image information is used. And, based on the player operating the predetermined operation means in the first period, the color of at least a part of the image of the predetermined display type using the drawing instruction information generation means Based on the means for displaying the changed image and the display type displayed for the command received from the main control means based on the player operating the predetermined operation means during the second period Means for displaying a determined image of the effect display content.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the control by the sub-control means. Image display means for displaying an image, and the sub-control means is used for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and for drawing an image by the image drawing means. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information and a read operation that is faster than the first image storage means, storing the image information stored in the first image storage means, and storing the image information Second image storage means capable of rewriting image information to be performed, first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of the displays Of the image information necessary for rendering an image of the display type and the second image storage means provided for each screen and indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed in the display type First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information indicating the transfer start timing of image information to be transferred to the first regulation information corresponding to the display type identified by the first display identification means First selection means for selecting from the first specified information storage means, first update means for updating first information every time when the image drawing means draws an image for one screen, and Second display specifying means for specifying a second display type for changing and displaying the color tone of at least a part of the image of the display type specified by the first display specifying means, and a plurality of the second display types Provided for each In the second display type, a second specification indicating drawing information for each screen indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed by changing from the color tone specified by the first specification information corresponding to the display type. Second regulation information storage means for storing information, and second selection means for selecting, from the second regulation information storage means, the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type identified by the second display identification means. And second update means for updating second information in conjunction with the update of the first update means, and the first rule selected by the first selection means each time the first update means is updated. Based on the information, the means for specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first information, and the updated second information based on the second specified information selected by the second selecting means For one screen corresponding to the information of 2 Means for specifying drawing information of an image to be displayed by changing from the color tone specified by the first specification information, and drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information necessary for the entire image for one screen; A drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means; The drawing information specified for each screen in the first specification information includes specification information for specifying image information necessary for drawing an image for the one screen, and generates the drawing instruction information The means is an image for instructing image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen from the specific information included in the drawing information based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. finger Drawing instruction information including information is generated, and the image drawing means includes the drawing instruction of the image information stored in the second image storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generation means. An image for one screen is drawn using the image information instructed by the image instruction information included in the instruction information, and the sub-control unit is configured to display one image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. Is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, the first transfer for controlling the transfer of the first image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before the image information is used. Based on the control means and the player operating the predetermined operation means during the first period, at least a part of the image of the predetermined display type is generated using the drawing instruction information generation means. And a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means based on a means for displaying an image whose color tone has been changed and a player operating a predetermined operation means in the second period. Means for displaying a determined image of the effect display content to be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the jackpot production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the delay prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fanfare command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to an embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are three types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, and “Big jackpot C”. After the special game state is over, these jackpot types are added as added value after the jackpot ends. A game value (game value) corresponding to the game is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are three types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, and “Big Jack C”.

  “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, and “Big jackpot C” all become a special game state with 5 rounds (5R jackpot), and then, after the jackpot ends, as added value after the jackpot ends Until the special symbol lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change). However, in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the jackpot is different for the “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C”. Specifically, “Big Jack A” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times, and “Big Jack B” Until the lottery ends 50 times, the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased. With “Big Jack C”, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. .

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (5R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends four times. This is called the probability variation period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability variation period of the special symbol is shown by using the number of lotteries of the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol probability change period is four times until the special symbol lottery ends, the special symbol probability change period is described as four times. Also, after the special symbol jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, that is, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery ends a predetermined number of times (20 times, 50 times, 100 times). The period between is usually referred to as a short time period of the symbol. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is shown by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is 20 times.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common, and depending on the type of jackpot, the “short time of normal symbols” The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Also, for example, instead of changing the period when the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory in the hit of a normal symbol. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A” is finished, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times, and “Big Jack B” is obtained. After the “Big Bonus B”, the regular symbol time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. When the “Big Bonus C” is reached, the special symbol lottery is 100 times after the “Big Bonus C”. The normal symbol time-short state continues until the end, but the duration of the short-time state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed 60 times, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. After that, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from a “special symbol low probability state” to a “special symbol high probability state”, regardless of the type of jackpot of that special symbol, the special symbol jackpot ends. Until the special symbol lottery ends four times. On the other hand, after a special symbol jackpot, after the jackpot ends and when the special symbol lottery ends four times, if the special symbol jackpot is not newly reached, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed to the special symbol after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. The lottery is continued until 4 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed four times after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this case, until at least six lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the four special symbol lotteries performed after the new jackpot are completed, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “ordinary symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery after the jackpot of the special symbol ends (for example, , 20 times, 50 times, 100 times). On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”. As described above, the predetermined number of times is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol. If the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the predetermined number of times is 20, and if the big hit type is “big hit B”, the predetermined number of times is If it is 50 times and “big hit C”, the predetermined number of times is 100 times.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further changed after the new special symbol jackpot ends. This is continued until the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of jackpots is completed. For example, after becoming “big hit A” and moving to “normal symbol time-short state”, when the “special symbol time-short state” becomes “hit C” in the 10th special symbol lottery, ”Is continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  As a result, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly made during the duration of the “ordinary symbol time saving state”, the normal symbol time saving period remaining until the new jackpot is invalidated. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, as soon as “special symbol jackpot A” is reached, the short time period of the normal symbol until then becomes invalid, and the “normal symbol normal state” will be drawn after the end of the “big jackpot A”. It will continue until it is finished 20 times. Therefore, when the short time period of normal symbols has been “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times” is given to the player. As a result, the player may feel dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost of the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. there were. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the player may be notified of a short time period of a normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  In particular, it is a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the jackpot ends. Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if the jackpot of another special symbol is made during the probability change period of the special symbol, the player may use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the normal symbol so far. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state and a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the jackpot effect ends (ending effect described later is performed), a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, Alternatively, the short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” being executed is performed. In the present embodiment, when performing the ending effect, the “definite effect display” is displayed based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize. Control is performed so that the player continues to have a willingness to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the start winning, the “determination effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the reserved start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot C”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the start information in the middle, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but this special symbol The ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time, when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of You may comprise so that "short-term display" may not be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player feels lost of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In addition, there is a start winning that is “special design jackpot” in the start winning prize that is on hold, the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, and in the start information that is on hold If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on this, the “short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot. In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the starting information in the inside, “short-term display” is performed in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” is displayed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot You can go. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (a high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which are even numbers, are added are arranged. In addition, if it is “big hit B”, a variable display in which main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, and 9” except “7” are added is displayed. Fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd number “7” is added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is out of place, a continuous notice effect is performed that suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit (notice). In this case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, “3”, “4”, “1” in the main symbol combination in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1. ), The so-called “chance” is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show display screens displayed in the ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect. FIG.

  In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and then a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 has the first symbol display device. In response to the 37 variation display, the 3rd symbol variation display is performed.

  When the 3rd symbol variation display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the 3rd symbol's high-speed variation display is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). When the time elapses, the display switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are aligned is performed, the variation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are not aligned is performed, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol will be drawn and the next variation effect will be started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and also notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol time period) given to the player after the jackpot ends (displays the time period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that a lottery result will be a big hit in a special symbol lottery that is on hold (to perform a definite effect display). In the ending effect, the fact that the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) is notified to the player is referred to as “short time period display”, and the lottery result becomes a big hit in the special symbol lottery that is on hold. This is referred to as “confirmed effect display” being performed.

  When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in accordance with the timing at which the stop display of the third symbol is made. A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare effect is started following the variation effect.

  Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the fanfare effect. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the state is continued until the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated five times (5 rounds).

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. After that, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round production from the 1st round to the 5th round is performed in order.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is completed five times (five rounds). As a result, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending effect, the end of the special gaming state is notified to the player, and a short time period display is performed (the game value given to the player after the jackpot end (the short time period of the normal symbol) is the game. Or a finalized effect display is performed (the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big hit in the special symbol lottery that is on hold). Whether “short-term display” or “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect depends on the jackpot type of the special symbol, the jackpot type of the reserved special symbol, and the value of the ending mode counter 223e. And so on.

  When “short time display” is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “50 chances” (period) is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. An example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is made and the lottery result is “Big Jack B”. After the jackpot is over, the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. Means to continue. In addition, when the “short time period display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, “20 chances” (an example of period information) is displayed, and the special symbol is displayed. If the lottery result is “big hit C”, “100 chances” (an example of period information) is displayed. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period in which the normal symbol time-saving state will continue (the normal symbol time-saving period).

  The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the second entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be an opportunity to win the normal symbol. Become more. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, when the “definite effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, “Super Chance!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Another example of information) is displayed. This screen means that a lottery result will always be a big hit if any lottery is held among lots of special symbols that are on hold. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that it will be a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol lottery that has been put on hold. Can be held. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7, 107, 282” is a special symbol for the low probability. Stored in the jackpot random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 44” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “45 to 89” is “Big Jack B”, and the jackpot type when the value is “90 to 99” is “Big Jack C”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hits (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) are determined by the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Yes. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back off” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth off” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that becomes a normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is "5-28". These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probable change. It includes a counter 203e, a time reduction counter 203f, a pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, a probability-changing success / failure determination execution flag 203h, and a pre-reading delay flag 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice determination counter 223g, a series of fluctuating effects held at that time To determine whether or not to perform a continuous notice effect.

  The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the special symbol lottery result that accompanies the winning (start prize) at the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol. Thus, the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against. In this embodiment, when continuous notice effects are performed over all the variable effects held at the time of winning a prize, chances are displayed in each variable effect, but the same character or the same in each variable effect You may comprise so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. Moreover, you may display so that the number of the same characters and the number of characters related to the same character may be increased every time each variation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the variation effect different from the normal one has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all of the variation effects that have been put on hold.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1. Of the series of variation effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the last variation effect is not displayed as a chance symbol as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. Even if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player can win the special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be expected.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, the predicted various information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the various information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as a winning information. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is made. Set the mode. In this way, main controller 110 predicts various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning from each counter value acquired in accordance with the starting winning ( For the complicated processes such as the process of deciding whether or not to start the continuous notice effect based on the various information (presence / absence, stop type, fluctuation pattern), the voice lamp control This is done with the device 113. Thereby, the process in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 113, the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect can be set in various modes.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (Refer to S704 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 22).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 of FIG. 23: No).

  The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable variation state. If the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and 4 is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, 4 is simply set regardless of the value of the probability changing counter 203e (see S212 in FIG. 18). After that, while the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S219 in FIG. 18).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. If the value of the middle counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S304 and S305 in FIG. 19).

  Further, in the special symbol variation start process, a probability variation success / failure determination execution flag 203h, which will be described later, is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203e. In the special symbol variation start process, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state)” based on the value of the probability variation counter 203e. Therefore, the probability change determination flag 203h can be easily and reliably set. As will be described later, the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 at intervals of 2 milliseconds, but in the timer interrupt process in which the prefetch is being performed. Whether or not to perform the next timer interruption process can be easily and reliably set based on the setting of the probability change determination determination flag 203h.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203f.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 20, and when it is determined to be “big hit B”, it is set to 50, and “big hit C”. If it is determined that it is, it is set to 100 (see S214 to S216 in FIG. 18). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is ended until the value of the hour / minute counter 203f becomes 0 (S221 in FIG. 18).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 22).

  When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning prize, the pachinko machine 10 Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a flag that indicates what should be done.

  When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S914 in FIG. 25), and is set to 4 every time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is a special symbol jackpot. . That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, it is simply set to 4 regardless of the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (see S507 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the pre-reading of the lottery for the special symbol is completed (S509 in FIG. 21).

  When the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a stop type selection table for high probability, and Each table of the special symbol jackpot type table is compared with the winning data acquired in accordance with the starting winning prize. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, each of the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, the stop type selection table for the low probability time, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and the start winning prize The winning data acquired in response is compared.

  Probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol probability change state (high probability of a special symbol) in the timer interrupt processing being executed among timer interrupt processing executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds. Is a flag indicating that a special symbol lottery has been performed. If the probability change determination flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state during the timer interruption process being executed. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery was performed when the pachinko machine 10 was in the normal state of the special symbol during the timer interruption process being executed, or In the timer interrupt process being executed, the pachinko machine 10 indicates that the special symbol lottery is not performed regardless of the special symbol special state or the special symbol normal state.

  This probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is normally set to OFF. When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds is started and the timer interrupt process is being executed, and the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more in the timer interrupt process. When a special symbol change start process (see FIG. 19) for performing a lottery (whether or not determination) of “special symbol big hit” or “extra special symbol” is executed, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is set to ON. (See S303 in FIG. 19). As a result, it is possible to easily and reliably indicate that the special symbol lottery (whether or not) has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state during the timer interruption process being executed. it can.

  Then, the probability change execution determination flag 203h is more than the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 17) including the special symbol variation start process among the processes executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). It is referred to in a start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) executed later. In the start winning process, if the winning change determination flag 203h during probability change is ON, even if the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 due to the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64, the special symbol The lottery result prefetching (see S408 in FIG. 20) is skipped and made unexecuted (see S407: Yes in FIG. 20). In this way, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading of the lottery with the special symbol by the probability change success / failure execution flag 203h.

  Here, in the start winning process, the reason why the lottery pre-reading in the special symbol is skipped and not executed when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on will be described. As described above, when the timer interrupt process is executed, various processes are executed, and after the special symbol variation process is executed, the start winning process is executed. In addition, as described above, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol during the timer interruption process being executed. It is shown that That is, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, a special symbol variation process that is executed prior to the start winning process is executed in the timer interruption process being executed, and as a result, the special symbol is changed. In the variation processing, it means that a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is made when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state.

  As described above, when the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the first hit stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the values match each other, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 makes a pass / fail judgment by comparing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the execution area with each of the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. Therefore, if a matching value is not found, the processing takes a long time. Further, if a matching value is not found and the result of the special symbol lottery (decision of success / failure) is lost, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the stop type selection table as a process for determining the stop type at the time of disconnection. Since the process of comparing with the random number value being performed is performed, the process further takes time. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to a random number value that becomes a “rear and forward outreach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred, After the occurrence, a process is performed to compare the random number value that becomes “reach other than front / rear out” that stops when the final stop symbol is not before or after the reach symbol, or the random value that becomes “completely out” without reach.

  Further, the MPU 201 provided in the main controller 110 normally uses an 8-bit MPU to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, but using this 8-bit MPU, a 2-byte MPU is used. It takes a lot of processing time to compare the values of the first random number counter C1 which is a counter.

  On the other hand, in the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol, the counter C1 for the first random number and the first type counter C2 acquired by entering the ball into the first entrance 64 as in the case of the original special symbol lottery. From the value of the stop type selection counter C3, various types of information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) obtained when the original special symbol lottery is performed are predicted (estimated).

  Therefore, assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the special symbol is in a probabilistic state, when prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol, the value of the counter C1 per first random number acquired by entering the first entrance 64 is calculated. Compare each of the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability with the random number stored in the stop type selection table. Compare. Therefore, this processing also requires a lot of processing time.

  As a result, in one timer interruption process, a special symbol lottery executed when the special symbol variation display starts, and a special symbol executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. When the lottery result prefetching is executed together, the processing time exceeds the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt processing being executed is executed. However, there was a possibility that it could not be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is ON, the lottery pre-reading in the special symbol is skipped and is not executed. When the symbol is in a probable change state, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery and the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interruption process. In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interruption is performed, and the start winning process (see FIG. 17) for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol. (Refer to S106), the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable state of the special symbol before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. It can be determined easily and reliably. Therefore, the special symbol lottery (whether or not determination), which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably performed with priority in the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the probability change execution determination flag 203h is reset to OFF at the end of the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) (see S415 in FIG. 20). As a result, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is set to ON / OFF in the special symbol variation process every time the timer interrupt process is executed. It should be noted that resetting the probability change execution determination flag 203h during the probability change is not necessarily performed at the end of the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17), and the timer interruption process being executed is ended after the start winning process is completed. You can do it before. In addition, the probability change determination flag 203h may be reset at the start of the timer interrupt process.

  Whether the prefetch delay flag 203i performs the delay prefetch process (see S105 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process being executed among the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 18) executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds. It is a flag indicating whether or not. When this flag is on, it indicates that delayed prefetch processing is performed during the timer interrupt processing being executed. When it is off, delayed prefetch processing is performed during the timer interrupt processing being performed. Indicates not to do.

  The delayed look-ahead process is a lottery for a special symbol based on the values of various counters obtained by the entry when a ball entering the first entrance 64 is detected by the previous timer interruption process. This is a process of prefetching the result (see FIG. 21). When this delay prefetching process is executed by the MPU 201, the state of the prefetch delay flag 203i is confirmed, and if the state is on (see S501 in FIG. 21), the lottery result is prefetched in the special symbol ( (See S502 to S509 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the state of the prefetch delay flag 203i is off (see S501 in FIG. 21), the prefetch process of the special symbol is not prefetched, the delay prefetch process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The prefetch delay flag 203i is normally set to off. Then, in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) executed in the timer interruption process, when the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 due to the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64, the probability change When the medium win / fail determination execution flag 203h is on and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped and not executed (S407: Yes in FIG. 20), the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on.

  As a result, during the timer interruption process being executed, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed, and the probability changing success / failure determination flag 203h is turned on. Then, even if the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the timer interruption being executed, the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, and the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. Skipped rather than done. However, since the prefetch delay flag 203i is referred to when the next timer interrupt process is executed, it is easy and reliable that the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol was not performed in the previous timer interrupt process. The lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read based on the values of the various counters acquired with the winnings detected in the previous timer interruption process.

  Therefore, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be surely performed in the previous timer interrupt process, and the previous timer interrupt is performed. If prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped during the process, the prefetching can be performed in the next timer interrupt process, so the chance of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is reduced. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player. Further, in this case, in the next timer interruption process in which the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, so the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, This can be done without causing a large delay.

  Note that the prefetch delay flag 203i is reset to off when it is confirmed that the prefetch delay flag 203i is on during the delay prefetch processing, and the lottery result prefetch is performed on a special symbol. In addition, since the variation effect executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variable effect is performed, the next timer allocation is performed. In the included process, a special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variation effect is never generated. Therefore, in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the variation effect that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is not started.

  In the present embodiment, the winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Specifically, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided in correspondence with the first entrance 64 in one timer interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) is off. Is detected, it is detected in the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that the first entrance switch is ON, and further timer interrupt process (third timer interrupt process) When it is detected that the first entrance switch is turned on, it is detected that there is a ball winning at the first entrance 64. Thereby, when the output of the first entrance switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the winning of the ball. Thus, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, if the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process, In the timer interruption process, no winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. Therefore, the start winning is not detected in both of the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous.

  Here, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process, and the special symbol This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the lottery is performed. After that, the next timer interrupt process is executed, and if the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. In the timer interrupt process, the special symbol lottery is performed. The lottery result in the special symbol is not pre-read with the winning of a new ball in the first entrance 64. Therefore, there is no need to further delay the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol, such as waiting for prefetching after turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i until a plurality of timer interruption processes are executed. Therefore, in one timer interrupt process, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state, a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is performed, and the special timer lottery for which the special symbol lottery has been performed is performed. When a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the insertion process, the lottery result for the special symbol may be pre-read in the next timer interruption process.

  When the prefetch delay flag 203i is set to ON and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed in the delay prefetch processing, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) indicating the lottery result is used as the winning information command. It is included and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (S505 of S21).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a continuous notice determination table 222a. In addition, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an ending state counter 223e, and a short time display are displayed. A flag 223f, a continuous notice determination counter 223g, a continuous notice number counter 223h, and a post-notice big hit flag 223i are provided. For convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination table 222a in the ROM 222 will be described after explaining the continuous notice determination counter 223g in the RAM 223.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area. Thereafter, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the current time based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g. It is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for the series of fluctuating effects.

  As described above, the continuous notice effect suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol performed with the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol (notice). This is a kind of notice effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. Even if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player can win the special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be expected.

  The winning information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, a big jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state and displays a short time period (notifies the player of the game value (ordinary time period of normal symbol) given to the player after the jackpot ends) Or, it is an effect for performing a definite effect display (notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the special symbol lottery that is on hold).

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the winning information storing area 223a is referred to, and the stored winning information includes the winning information indicating the jackpot of the special symbol. If there is winning information indicating the special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning information is acquired. Then, based on the acquired special symbol jackpot type, the current special symbol jackpot type, the value of the ending mode counter 223e, etc., in the ending effect, "short time period display" or "confirmed effect display" is performed And a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect (“short time period display” or “determined effect display”) is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 30). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot) and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h. Or whether to set the stop type as a chance.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “special symbol jackpot”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1711 in FIG. 33). In addition, even when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out of special symbol” and the continuous notice counter 223h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see FIG. 33, S1711). On the other hand, if the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out of special symbol” and the continuous notice count counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance item is replaced with the extracted stop type. The stop type is set (see S1712 in FIG. 33).

  The ending mode counter 223e is a counter used for determining the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The updating of the ending mode counter 223e is performed, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 3, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3). In this embodiment, when the display mode in the ending effect is determined, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222, and the ending mode counter 223e is compared. Is determined to be a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table.

  Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223e is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is performed. (See S1612 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223e is other than a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “short time display” is performed. (See S1614 in FIG. 32).

  However, when deciding the display mode in the ending effect, there is a start winning that is “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winning, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C” In addition, when the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “hit A” based on the pending start information, “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “hit C”. The display mode of the ending effect is set in (see FIG. 32). In addition, there is a start winning that is “special design jackpot” in the start winning prize that is on hold, the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, and in the start information that is on hold Based on the jackpot type of the next special symbol based on “Big Jack C”, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that “short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot ( (See FIG. 32).

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect ("short time display" or "determined effect display") is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The short time period display flag 223f is a flag that is referred to when determining the display mode of the ending effect, and the short time period display flag 223f is normally set to OFF. When determining the display mode of the ending effect, if the short-term display flag 223f is off, the display mode of the ending effect is set to “short-time display” based on the value of the ending mode counter 223e described above. A determination is made as to “determined effect display”. On the other hand, when the display mode of the ending effect is determined, if the short time period display flag 223f is ON, the display mode of the ending effect is set to “short time period display”.

  The short-term display flag 223f has a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize when determining the display mode of the ending effect, and further, this special symbol jackpot type Is set to ON when the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot C” based on the pending start information. Here, when the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON, the display mode of the ending effect for this time ("big hit A") is set to "short time period display". Thereafter, when the display mode of the next ending effect is determined, the short-term display flag 223f is referred to, and if the flag is ON, the flag is turned OFF and the display mode of the ending effect of this time ("big hit C") is displayed. Is also set to “short time display”. As a result, when the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A” and the lottery jackpot type of the lottery that will be the next jackpot among the lottery of the special symbols that are put on hold is “jackpot C”, In the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, “short-term display” is performed.

  As described above, “Big Bonus A” has the shortest time period for normal symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Big Bonus C” has the shortest period for normal symbols “Lottery for special symbols” Until the end of 100 times ". Therefore, if the “Ending effect” corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time (“Big jackpot A”) and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of the next time (“Big jackpot C”) are performed respectively, It is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is greatly extended and the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is extended most. Further, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of normal symbols has become more advantageous than the previous time. Accordingly, the player can be given an impression that a game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  The continuous notice determination counter 223g is a counter used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous notice determination counter 223g is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the special symbol jackpot type of this time, the special jackpot type of the reserved special symbol, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, etc. Based on this, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1410 in FIG. 30).

  The value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is compared with a continuous notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 9) described below, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is within a range predetermined in the continuous notice determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1516 and S1517 in FIG. 31).

  When a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the continuous notice determination table 222a sets a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 31)). If satisfied, it is a table for setting “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 9, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables, a continuous notice determination table 222a1 for a big hit and a continuous notice determination table 222a2 for a loss. When the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main controller 110 is “special symbol jackpot”, the sound lamp controller 113 selects the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and receives the winning information. In the case where the success / failure is “exclusion of special symbol”, the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal is selected. Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol out”).

  The special symbol hold ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) in the sound lamp control device 113 can be taken as both the big hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing. A range of a continuous notice determination counter 223g that determines the start of a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined in association with each value “1” to “4”.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the consecutive notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot defines “0” as the consecutive notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, and the special symbol “0-15” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “2” of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice determination range is associated with the value “3” of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b. “0 to 39” is defined, and “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

  In addition, the consecutive notice determination table 222a2 at the time of detachment defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In association with “2”, “0-9” is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range, and “0-25” is set as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In accordance with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, “0 to 39” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 31)). If satisfied, one of the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability. Then, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b at that time is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g at that time is determined as the continuous notice determination. When included in the range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Now, as for the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing in the example of FIG. 9, the continuous notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b increases. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to make a decision to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of continuous notice determination increases, so that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of a big hit and the continuation at the time of losing Both of the notice determination tables 222a2 are defined such that the larger the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is, the higher the probability of continuous notice determination is. To do. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  9 is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the same special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is defined such that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit is the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing. In other words, the probability of continuous notice determination when the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “special symbol jackpot” is the probability of continuous notice decision when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out of special symbol”. Is set to be equal to or higher than Thereby, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is suggested to the player that the game state is likely to become a “special symbol jackpot” after the end of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, high expectations can be given to the player. In addition, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the lottery performed when winning the ball to the first entrance 64) is “special symbol jackpot” is “ Since it is set to be smaller than the probability of “out”, when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “exclusion of special symbol”, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being frequently performed. On the other hand, in the case of “special symbol jackpot”, it is possible to easily perform a continuous notice effect.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, not only when the winning information extracted from the winning information command received from the main control device 110 is “special symbol jackpot”, but the winning information is “excluded from special symbol”. Even when the variation pattern of the winning information is “out-of-front / reach reach”, the permission determination for the continuous notice effect is performed. Accordingly, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even when the variation pattern of the winning information is “out-of-front / reach reach” or the like, so the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed under various conditions. Can be done. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, since the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The continuous notice counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. When the initial value of the continuous notice counter 223h is set to 0 and a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the special symbol holding ball at that time The value of the number counter 223b is stored (see S1518 in FIG. 31).

  The value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more, instead of the extracted stop type, the chance eye is set as the stop type (see S1712 in FIG. 33), and the set stop type is The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1715 in FIG. 33).

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the active line L1 shown in FIG. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1711 in FIG. 33), and the set stop is set. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Note that the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is held at 0 (see S1714: No in FIG. 33). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 1, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, and therefore, as the stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 without setting the chance, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1711 in FIG. 33), and the set stop type is the display stop type. The display control device 114 is notified by the command. However, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1715 in FIG. 33).

  Thus, while the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more, every time a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, a chance item is set as the stop type, and the set value is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect being performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol that becomes a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous notice number counter 223h stores the value of the special symbol hold number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, and each time a stop type command is received thereafter. If the value is 1 or more, the value is decreased by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop symbols that become chance chances are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. That is, stop symbols that become chances are continuously displayed.

  Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop pattern of the changing effect most watched during the game. Even if the stop symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chance symbol is displayed, so that the player will receive a special symbol jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. The expectation obtained can be given.

  Further, when the winning information command is received in the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (see FIG. 31 S1506). If the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (see S1507: Yes in FIG. 31), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. It determines with satisfying (condition 1) among the predetermined conditions mentioned above, and determines the start of a continuous notice effect with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, and wins the first entrance 64. Based on the winning data (each counter C1-C3 value) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched, and various information obtained by the prefetch (win / no-go, stop type, change) Pattern) is included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the winning information command, stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a, and decides to start the continuous notice effect according to the contents of the winning information storage area 223a. Judging. Then, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop type is set for each variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  As for the post-notice jackpot flag 223i, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice number counter 223h, so that all the continuous notice effects set for a plurality of variable effects are executed. It is a flag indicating a gaming state after a subsequent variation effect. When the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after execution of all the continuous notice effects is in the “special symbol jackpot” state. When the value of the flag 223i is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after the execution of all the continuous notice effects is in the “excluded special symbol” state. The variation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a change effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1.

  This post-notice jackpot flag 223i indicates the winning information extracted from the winning information command command when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect based on the winning information command received from the main controller 110. If the win is “special symbol jackpot”, ON is set (S1520 in FIG. 31), and if the win information extracted from the win information command command is “special symbol out”, OFF is set ( (S1521 in FIG. 31). The value is held until the next start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Further, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is being executed when the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the post-notice big hit flag 223i (see S1508 in FIG. 31). If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (see S1508: Yes in FIG. 31), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is a “special symbol jackpot” state, the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the meantime, it is determined whether there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) (that is, whether the difference between the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is three or more). Then, it is determined whether or not (condition 2) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above (see S1510 in FIG. 31).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is OFF (see S1508: No in FIG. 31), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the state of “excluding special symbol”, it is further determined whether or not the winning information newly notified by the winning information command is “special symbol jackpot”, and the predetermined condition described above It is determined whether or not (Condition 3) is satisfied (see S1511 in FIG. 31).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 34).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 11 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the change pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” in the lower right position toward the screen, and “◯” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 11 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 11 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.12 and FIG.13, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 12 and 13 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Is the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, FIG. 12B is the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 13 is the back C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the player changes the stage to “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 13A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 13C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.13 (a), and the back image of Fig.13 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 12A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Also, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 13A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 13A to 13B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 13A to 13B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images in FIGS. 13A to 13B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 13 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 13 (b) to 13 (c) and 13 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 13B to 13C and FIGS. 13C to 13A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 13A to 13B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images shown in FIGS. 13B to 13C and FIGS. 13C to 13A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  On the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 10) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and a fanfare effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special gaming state and informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 15 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 15).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 34). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 45B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 36) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S2109 of (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 44) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 45A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 36B). ) (See S2103)), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 16) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 36B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 42). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 46). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 36B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 27. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). When the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on in the previous timer interrupt process, a delay prefetch process for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is executed (S105). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S106). Details of the special symbol variation process, the delayed look-ahead process, and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S107), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S108). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display device performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, jackpot B or jackpot C is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), 4 is set to the probability changing counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S212).

  Next, it is determined what kind of jackpot type out of the big jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) of three types of special symbols (S213). 20 is set in the middle counter 203f (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 50 is set in the hour / short counter 203f (S215), and if the jackpot type is jackpot C, 100 is set in the hour / counter counter 203f (S216). Then, a special symbol jackpot start is set (S217), and the process is terminated. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S217, if the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the fanfare command is set. Is done. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly set, the short time period of the normal symbol (the duration of the “short time state of the normal symbol”) is set according to the jackpot type of the new special symbol. . Therefore, if the special symbol jackpot is newly won during the continuation of the “normal symbol short-time state”, the short-term period of the normal symbol after the jackpot of the new special symbol is set according to the new jackpot type. Therefore, the short time period of the normal symbol remaining until the new jackpot is invalidated. For example, when the special symbol jackpot C is reached and the “normal symbol normal state” shifts to the “normal symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the “big jackpot C” ends. Will continue until. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period of the normal symbol until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal state of normal symbol”, the special symbol lottery will be held 20 times after the end of the “big jackpot A” It will continue until it ends. Therefore, when the short time period of normal symbols has been “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times” is given to the player. I will give it. As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, a short time period display is performed in the ending effect, and the player may be notified of the short time period of the normal symbol. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  In addition, if a special symbol is a big hit and the special symbol is in a high probability state, it is likely to be a special symbol big hit. Is likely to be. Therefore, while shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol, it is easy to give the player the impression that the short time period has been shortened.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state and a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. When the jackpot effect ends (the ending effect described later is performed), is the confirmed effect display notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes? Alternatively, a short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” being executed is performed. In the present embodiment, when performing the ending effect, the “definite effect display” is displayed based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize. Appropriate selection is made as to whether or not the “short time display” is performed, so that the player is given the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened as much as possible (see FIG. 32). That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more (S218), and the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S218: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability changing counter 203e (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S220). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S221), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability changing counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, so the probability changing success / failure determination execution flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the processing of S304 is performed. Transition. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, the fact that the special symbol variation start process has performed the lottery (decision determination) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is the same. This is a process executed in the timer interruption process, and can be notified to the start winning process performed after the special symbol variation start process. Then, in the start winning process, when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is referred to. If the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, a special symbol is displayed. The pre-reading of the lottery result in can be skipped and not executed.

  Note that, at the stage where the execution of the special symbol variation start process is started, the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is always reset to OFF by the start winning process (see FIG. 20) performed after the special symbol variation start process. (S415 in FIG. 20), the certainty change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is always kept off. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the process branches to S302: No, so that the process of S303 is not executed, and the probability change execution determination flag 203h is kept off. Therefore, in this case, even if the special symbol lottery is performed, if the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the start winning process, the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read.

  The special symbol lottery performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state is obtained by using the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a for high probability. Since it is performed by comparing one by one with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table, if a matching value is not found, the time required for the processing becomes long. Further, when a matching value is not found and the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is used as a random number value stored in the stop type selection table as a process for determining the stop type at the time of release. Since the process of comparing with is performed, it takes more time to process. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is set to a random number value that becomes a “rear and forward outreach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred, After the occurrence, a process is performed to compare the random number value that becomes “reach other than front / rear out” that stops when the final stop symbol is not before or after the reach symbol, or the random value that becomes “completely out” without reach.

  Therefore, in one timer interruption process, in the special symbol that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery that is executed in accordance with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 If the lottery result prefetching is executed together, the processing time will exceed the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt process being executed will be executed. There is a possibility that it cannot be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, in the start winning process, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is ON, the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped and is not executed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interruption process.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interruption process is a start winning process (see FIG. 17) for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol. 17 (see S106 of FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not a special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol change state before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. . Therefore, the special symbol lottery, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably given priority in the timer interrupt process.

  In the timer interrupt process, the special symbol variation process may be performed after the start winning process. In this case, before the start winning process, a process for determining whether or not a special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol variation process is performed, the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, and the special symbol is changed. When the special symbol lottery is performed in the variation process, the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol may not be executed in the start winning process.

  In addition, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read in the start winning process, the special symbol lottery performed in the special symbol variation process is delayed so that it can be performed in the next timer interruption process. May be. This also prevents the special symbol lottery and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being performed simultaneously in one timer interruption process.

  In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Then, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. It is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big jackpots (jackpots A, Among the jackpots B and jackpots C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  In the processing of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are stipulated. Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S308 or S310 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, the start winning information process (S106) will be described first, and then the delay prefetching process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S106). This start winning process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change determination flag 203h is ON (S407). When the probability change determination flag 203h is off (S407: No), the special symbol change process executed before the current start winning process is special when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state. Since the symbol lottery is not performed, the processing of S408 to S413 is executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol.

  When the probability change during-progress determination execution flag 203c is OFF, it indicates that a special symbol lottery is not performed in the special symbol variation process executed before the current start winning process, or the pachinko machine 10 When the special symbol is in the normal state, it indicates that the special symbol has been drawn. Therefore, even if the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, there is no possibility that the time taken for the timer interrupt process being executed will exceed the execution interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not performed, or when the special symbol lottery is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the start winning process is performed to the first entrance 64. If a winning of a ball is detected, it is possible to surely prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. Therefore, since it can suppress that the opportunity for the prefetch of the lottery result in a special symbol to be reduced, it can suppress that the opportunity of an interest improvement with respect to a player decreases.

  In the process of S408, based on the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g in the RAM 203 and the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol (whether or not a big hit) and its stop type (big hit) In this case, the jackpot type) and its fluctuation pattern are predicted (S408). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the special symbol big hit random number for high probability. It is determined by comparing each of 30 random values (winning values) stored in a table (not shown). As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the special symbol big hit random number table (low probability) Judgment is made by comparing each of three random values (winning values) stored in each (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the first random number counter C1 value, Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, Of the three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. The stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, based on a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). It will be selected accordingly. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S408 predicts whether or not the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S409).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a. Then, it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  After the winning information command is set by the process of S409, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted by the process of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S410). If the lottery result predicted in the process of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S410: Yes), 4 is set in the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (S411), and the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, when the lottery result predicted in the process of S408 is out of the special symbol (S410: No), it is determined whether the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more (S412), and the prefetching probability changing counter 203g If it is 1 or more (S412: Yes), the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S413), and the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, in the process of S407, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is off (S407: No), pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol (the processes of S408 to S413) is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S407, when the probability change determination flag 203c is on (S407: Yes), the prefetch delay flag 203i is set on (S414), and the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, when the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203c is on, the special symbol is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol in the variation process executed before the current start winning process. Indicates that a lottery is being held. That is, in the MPU 201, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability are used. A process of comparing one by one or comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with a random value that becomes “front / rear out of reach”, etc., is performed when the special symbol is off, which takes a long time. ing.

  In such a situation, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained by entering the first entrance 64 is stored in the special symbol big random number table. It is the same as the lottery of special symbols, such as comparing the random number value with the random number value, or comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value that becomes “out-of-front reach”, etc. Since the process is repeated, this process also requires a lot of processing time. Therefore, those processing times exceeded the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (for example, 2 milliseconds), and there is a possibility that the timer interrupt process being executed cannot be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. .

  On the other hand, if the probability change success / failure determination execution flag 203h is on, skipping the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol and not executing it will result in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variation state. It is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being executed together in one timer interrupt process. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 17) for drawing a special symbol in one timer interrupt is based on the start winning process (see S106 in FIG. 17) for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol. Also done before. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely determine whether or not a special symbol lottery has been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol change state before the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched. . In addition, prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be easily and reliably not executed. Therefore, the special symbol lottery, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be easily and reliably given priority in the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the special symbol variation process can be performed after the start winning process in the timer interruption process. In this case, before the start winning process, a process for determining whether or not a special symbol lottery is performed in the special symbol variation process is performed, the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, and the special symbol is changed. When the special symbol lottery is performed in the variation process, pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol is not executed in the start winning process. In addition, when the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read in the start winning process, the special symbol lottery performed in the special symbol variation process is delayed so that it can be performed in the next timer interruption process. May be. This also prevents the special symbol lottery and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from being performed simultaneously in one timer interruption process.

  In addition, when the next timer interrupt process is executed by turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i by the process of S414, the various types stored in the process of S406 in the delay prefetch process (see S105 in FIG. 17). Based on the value of the counter, the lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probabilistic state, the special symbol, which is the most important process, can be surely performed in one timer interruption process, and the lottery result in the special symbol can be obtained. Can be read by the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a decrease in the chances of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process. In this case, the winning to the first entrance 64 is not detected in the next timer interruption process. Therefore, the start winning is not detected in both of the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous. Similarly, since the variation effect executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the variable effect is performed, the next timer In the interruption process, a special symbol lottery process associated with the start of the changing effect is never generated. Therefore, in two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the variation effect that is executed in conjunction with the special symbol lottery is not started. Therefore, when prefetching the lottery result for a special symbol in the next timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process does not exceed the execution interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. . Therefore, prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be surely performed in the next timer interruption process, and prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol can be performed without causing a large delay. In the process of S415, the correct / incorrect change determination execution flag 203h is turned off (S415), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the delay prefetching process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the delay prefetch process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). This delay prefetching process prefetches the lottery result in a special symbol when the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on in the previously executed timer interrupt process.

  In this delay prefetching process, it is first determined whether or not the prefetch delay flag 203i is on (S501). If the prefetch delay flag 203i is off (S501: No), nothing is done, that is, special This process is terminated without prefetching the lottery result for the symbol. On the other hand, when the prefetch delay flag 203i is on (S501: Yes), the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned off (S502), and the subsequent processes of S503 to S509 are executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. .

  In the process of S503, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are read (S503). Here, as described above, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process. This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the special symbol lottery is performed. Further, since the detection of the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is performed over the three timer interruption processes as described above, the first entrance 64 in the previous timer interrupt process. If a winning of a ball is detected, a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is never detected in this timer interruption process. Therefore, the values of the various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the end are acquired and stored based on the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 in the previous timer interruption process. Will be.

  The various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the end are specified based on the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. That is, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, various counters stored in the reserved first area are specified as various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, various counters stored in the reserved second area are stored in the reserved third area when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 3. When the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 4, the various counters stored in the reserved fourth area are specified as the last counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Next, on the basis of the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g in the RAM 203 and various counter values read out in the process of S503, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol and its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) Then, the fluctuation pattern is predicted (S504). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 read in the processing of S503 and the special symbol big hit for a high probability. This is determined by comparing one by one with 30 random values (winning values) stored in a random number table (not shown). As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 read in the processing of S503 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. This is determined by comparing one by one with three random values (winning values) stored in (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the first random number counter C1 value, Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 read in the processing of S503 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. Among the three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 44”, it is a big hit A (5R big hit, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol short time period 20 times) If it is determined to be within the range of “45 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time reduction period 50 times), and within the range of “90 to 99” If there is, it is determined as jackpot C (5R jackpot, special symbol probability variation period 4 times, normal symbol time-short period 100 times) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the special symbol, the stop symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 read out in the process of S503 is out of front and back. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than forward / backward deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 read in the process of S503 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability changing counter 203e is 0, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined from the variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. It is selected according to. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C common", "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table in accordance with the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S504 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S505). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the lottery result in the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and each piece of information is used as winning information. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a and it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  After the winning information command is set in the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is a special symbol jackpot (S506). When the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is a special symbol jackpot (S506: Yes), 4 is set in the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g (S507), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the lottery predicted in the process of S504 is out of the special symbol (S506: No), it is determined whether the prefetching probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more (S508), and the prefetching probability changing counter 203g. Is 1 or more (S508: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S509), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the process of S509 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the prefetch delay flag 203i is on when the delay prefetch process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the lottery result of the special symbol skipped in the previous timer interrupt process is displayed. Prefetching can be performed. That is, the lottery result in the special symbol is pre-read based on the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. be able to.

  Here, as described above, the prefetch delay flag 203i is a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is determined when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probable state in one timer interrupt process. This is turned on when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected in the timer interruption process in which the special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol during the timer interruption processing being executed, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) processing is performed. Thus, when a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the prefetch delay flag 203i is turned on, and the lottery result in the special symbol is not prefetched and skipped.

  However, since the prefetch delay flag 203i is referred to when the next timer interrupt process is executed, it is easy and reliable that the prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol was not performed in the previous timer interrupt process. The lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read based on the values of the various counters acquired with the winnings detected in the previous timer interruption process. Therefore, even if the lottery result in the special symbol is not pre-read in the previous timer interrupt process, it is acquired with the winning detected in the previous timer interrupt process in the next timer interrupt process. Based on the values of the various counters, the lottery result in the special symbol can be pre-read.

  Therefore, the special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) process, which is the most important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be surely performed in the previous timer interrupt process, and the previous timer interrupt is performed. If prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is skipped during the process, the prefetching can be performed in the next timer interrupt process, so the chance of prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol is reduced. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the opportunity for improving the interest of the player. Further, in this case, in the next timer interruption process in which the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected, the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, so the lottery result in the special symbol is prefetched, This can be done without causing a large delay.

  As described above, since the variation effect is executed in units of several seconds to several tens of seconds, once the special symbol lottery is performed at the start of the variation effect, the next timer interruption process absolutely does the variation effect. There will be no special symbol drawing at the start. Further, in this embodiment, since the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes, the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected in a certain timer interruption process. In this case, the winning to the first entrance 64 is not detected in the next timer interruption process. Therefore, when prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol is performed because the prefetch delay flag 203i is on, the special symbol lottery associated with the start of the variation effect is performed in the timer interruption process. With the winning of a new ball to the ball opening 64, the lottery result in the special symbol is not prefetched.

  Therefore, there is no need to further delay the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol, such as waiting for prefetching after turning on the prefetch delay flag 203i until a plurality of timer interruption processes are executed. Therefore, in one timer interrupt process, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probable state, a special symbol lottery (whether or not) is performed, and the special timer lottery for which the special symbol lottery has been performed is performed. When a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected during the insertion process, the lottery result for the special symbol may be pre-read in the next timer interruption process.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S107). This normal symbol variation process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time-shortage counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623).
In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. If the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory will be performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S108). This through gate passing process (S108) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) or the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process or the delay prefetch process (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the fanfare command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 19). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S621, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) S217 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), a fanfare command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, a fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1107, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1108), and this processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all five rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1109, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1109 (S1109: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 29). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, the variable display setting process is executed (S1311). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 ends, the continuous notice determination counter 223g used for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect is updated (S1313). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is read from the RAM 223, and 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 223g.

  Next, the ending mode counter 223e used for selecting the display mode of the ending effect is updated (S1314). Specifically, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is read from the RAM 223, and 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (3 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the ending mode counter 223e is stored in the ending mode counter 223e.

  When the processing of S1314 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown flag are turned on (S1317), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The fluctuation display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). If a winning information command is received (S1409: Yes), a continuous notice determination process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous notice determination process, various types of information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching in the main controller 110 are extracted as winning information from the received winning information command, and the extracted winning information is won in the RAM 233. Stored in the information storage area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g, the variation effect held at that time is To determine whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1409 (S1409: No), it is next determined whether or not a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When a fanfare command is received (S1411: Yes), a display fanfare command is set (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. The display fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1413). When the round number command is received (S1413: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1414), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1415), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1413 (S1413: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1416). If an ending command is received (S1416: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S1417), and this process ends. In the ending setting process, the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the special game state being executed and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and the display according to the determination Ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1416 (S1416: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1418). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the continuous notice determination process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination process (S1410). This continuous notice determination process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 30). When received, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect.

  In this continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and any condition is satisfied. If so, it is next determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. If it is determined here that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the continuous notice effect is started. S1503 to S1511 to be described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1512 to S1517 to be described later start a continuous notice effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to do so.

  Note that (Condition 1) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) becomes “special symbol jackpot” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed, Between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the newly received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, two or more variation effects (holding ball) (That is, the difference between the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 3 or more), and (Condition 3) means that all the set continuous notice effects are set. When the game is completed, the special symbol is lost, and the success / failure included in the newly received winning information command is the special symbol jackpot.

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) are extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1501). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various types of information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When pre-reading is completed in main controller 110, a winning information command including various information obtained by pre-reading is transmitted from main controller 110 to sound lamp control device 113.

When the processing of S1501 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1501 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1502). In the processing of S1502, the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area is the first area.
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1503). If the winning information extracted is “special symbol jackpot” (S1503). : Yes), the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, if the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1503: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is “front / rear out of reach” ( S1504). In the process of S1504, when the fluctuation pattern of the extracted winning information is “front / rear out of reach” (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the extracted winning information is not “front / rear out of reach” but other fluctuation patterns (S1504: No), this process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1505, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1505), and then the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is substituted for the variable B (S1506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223h) is 0 (S1507). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1507: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed. Since it is not set and satisfies the above (Condition 1), the process proceeds to S1512, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the process after S1512.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223h) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1507: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (S1508). As described above, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, the game state after the change effect is “special” after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is OFF, after the variable effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. This indicates that the game state of the game will be in the state of “excluding special symbols”.

  Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (S1508: Yes), when all the set continuous notice effects are finished, the “special symbol jackpot” is obtained. That is, the difference between the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted into the variable C (S1509). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1510), and as a result, if the variable C is 3 or more (S1510: Yes), the variable effect corresponding to the received winning information command ( It can be determined that there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between the “holding ball” and the last fluctuating effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set. Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1507, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1510 that the above (Condition 2) is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1512, and the continuous notice effect is started by the processing after S1512. Decide whether or not to do.

  On the other hand, if the variable C is not 3 or more (ie, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information is continuously present at the present time. Since there are no two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1507, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1510 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  In the processing of S1508, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is on (S1508: Yes), it will be a “special symbol jackpot” when all the set continuous notice effects have ended. Due to the “special symbol jackpot”, the player's expectation by the continuous notice effect is temporarily interrupted. However, if (Condition 2) is satisfied, that is, the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received winning information command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the meantime, if there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls), it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, the chance symbol is always displayed as a stop symbol in two or more variable effects performed after the “special symbol jackpot”. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous notice effect, or to enhance the sense of expectation that the player feels about the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1508, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is OFF (S1508: No), it becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous announcement effects are completed. Therefore, it is further determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is “special symbol jackpot” (S1511). Then, if the winning / exclusion of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1511: Yes), the winning / losing included in the newly received winning information command is “special symbol jackpot”. From the results of the processing, the processing of S1508, and the processing of S1511, it can be determined that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1512, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the processes after S1512.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1511, if the winning / exclusion of the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1511: No), the result of the process of S1507, the process of S1508, and the process of S1511 is described above. It can be determined that none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect. Here, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1508: No), it becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the success / failure included in the newly received prize information command is “special symbol jackpot”. It is possible to prevent the notice effect from ending and becoming “special symbol detachment”, and then continuing to the notice effect and performing “special symbol detachment” again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the state of “exclusion of special symbol” continuously after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the special notice comes off after the end of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect is continued, the player can have a strong expectation of being a special feature jackpot. Can be motivated to continue playing games.

  As described above, in the processes of S1505 to S1511, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, if none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the process after S1512 for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is not executed, and therefore the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect is performed reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. Moreover, since the processing after S1512 is omitted, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load in the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S1512 to S1514, it is used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect from the two continuous notice determination tables 222a (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing). The continuous notice determination table (see FIG. 9) to be selected is selected.

  First, in the process of S1512, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the process of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1512). If the winning information of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1512: Yes), the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect. (S1513). On the other hand, if the winning information of the extracted winning information is “out of special symbol” (S1512: No), the consecutive notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as the successive notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect. (S1514).

  If the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1512 to S1514, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is acquired (S1515). Then, the continuous notice determination table selected in the process of S1513 or the process of S1514 (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing) and the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b ( The continuous notice determination range is specified based on the number N) of the variable display hold in the special symbol, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 223g (S1516).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range, and it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is started (S1517). In the process of S1517, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1517: No), the process after S1518 is skipped, and the command determination process is performed. Return to. That is, the setting of the continuous notice counter 223h is held as it is. Therefore, when there is a holding ball set to perform a fluctuating effect notice, a continuous notice effect is performed for the reserved ball, and when such a reserved ball does not exist, a continuous notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1517, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is to be started (S1517: Yes), the number of special symbol holding balls in the continuous notice number counter 223h. The value of the counter 223b is set (S1518). Here, by setting the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h by the processing of S1518, the variation effect held before the variation effect corresponding to the winning information command received this time is set. Execution of continuous notice effect is set for all. In other words, chances can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuating effects corresponding to the reserved balls held before the reserved balls corresponding to the winning information command received this time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information extracted in the processing of S1501 is a “special symbol jackpot” (S1519). If the winning information of the extracted winning information is “special symbol jackpot” (S1519: Yes), the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to ON (S1520), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning / extraction information of the extracted winning information is “exclusion of special symbol” (S1519: No), the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is set to OFF (S1521), and this process is terminated.

  If all the set continuous notice effects set by the process of S1520 or the process of S1521 are finished, it will be determined whether the “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol miss” will result in a post-notice jackpot flag 223i. Can be set to Thereby, when the continuous notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1508 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is used by using the value of the post-notice big hit flag 223i set here. It can be determined whether or not the above is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ending setting process (S1417) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1417). This ending setting process (S1417) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1417 in FIG. 30). When an ending command is received, an ending effect is obtained. This is a process for determining the display mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 determines “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 may play a special game after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is completed. At the same time, the big symbol effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare effect is first performed, and then the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all five rounds) is finished, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. In this embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, a confirmed effect display for notifying that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, or that is being executed A short time display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made while the “ordinary symbol time-short state” is continued, each time according to the jackpot type of the new special symbol. Because the short-term period (the duration of the “normal symbol short-time state”) is updated, if a special jackpot is newly won during the “normal symbol short-time state” duration, it will remain until the new jackpot is reached. The short time period of the normal symbol that was used becomes invalid. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal symbol normal state”, the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the “big jackpot A” ends. Will continue until. Therefore, when the short time period is “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, it gives the player the impression that it has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”. . As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, a short time period display is performed in the ending effect, and the player may be notified of the short time period of the normal symbol. When this notification notifies each of the normal symbol time-short period and the new normal symbol time-short period, the player can easily compare the short-time period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened than when the short time period of the normal symbol is not notified, and may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is expensive.

  Furthermore, when the special symbol is a big win and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the big jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the big jackpot ends) Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  Therefore, in this ending setting process, when performing the ending effect, based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time or the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, It is determined whether to perform “display” or “display for a short period of time”, so as not to give the player the impression that the short period of normal symbols has been shortened as much as possible. That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot A” based on the starting information of “No jackpot C”, the “Ending effect display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big jackpot C”. Do.

  As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are held, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the start information in the middle, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but this special symbol The ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time, when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of You may comprise so that "short-term display" may not be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, the player feels dissatisfied or the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In addition, in this ending setting process, in order to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, there is a start prize that becomes a “special jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and this special symbol If the jackpot type is “Big Jack A” and the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, "Period display". In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”, and the reserve When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the starting information in the inside, “short-term display” is performed in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot, When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” is displayed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot You can go. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short time period display flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). The short time period display flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the short time period display is performed in the ending effect. When this flag is set to ON, the ending is performed so that the short time period display is always performed in the ending effect. An effect display mode is set. In the process of S1601, if the short time period display flag 223f is on (S1601: Yes), the short time period display flag 223f is set to off (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when the short time period display flag 223f is off (S1601: No), all the winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233 is acquired. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning information includes winning information in which the success or failure is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603).

  In the present embodiment, the ending setting process is executed immediately before performing the ending effect. This is because more winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a than when the special symbol lottery result is determined to be a big win or when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state (5R big win). This is because there is a high possibility. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, when the player hits the special winning opening 65a in the special gaming state, Many balls enter the mouth 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  Therefore, it is better to wait until the end of the ending effect that is executed at the timing when the special gaming state ends than to acquire the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in advance. There is a high possibility that more winning information can be acquired from the storage area 223a. Therefore, in the process of S1603, it is possible to increase the possibility that it is determined that there is winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot”. That is, since the possibility of branching to S1603: Yes can be increased, based on the processing of S1604 to S1611 described later, the ending display mode is set to “determined effect display” or the ending display mode is set to “ Opportunities for controlling whether to set “short time display” can be increased. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied, or to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value. It can be suppressed and the player can continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that a higher added value game value has been obtained, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, regardless of the jackpot type, it becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5R jackpot). After that, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot ends. Until the lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (during the special symbol probable change period). And while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), the special number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls is reached. Until the symbol lottery ends, the state of special symbol change (during the special symbol change period) is maintained.

  While the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change period of a special symbol, it is easy to win a special symbol, so there is a high possibility that the next special symbol will be won immediately after the special symbol is hit. Also, during the probable period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state (during the special symbol's short-term period) Even if it is during a short period of time for normal symbols, it is difficult for the player to leave an impression that a game has been played using that short period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. There is a risk of feeling that a short time period has been set. In particular, when the newly set short time is shorter than the short time period of the previous regular symbol, the player feels dissatisfied and the player loses a sense of lost game value. There is a risk that the player's willingness to participate will be reduced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, after winning the special symbol jackpot, the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting until just before the start of the ending effect as shown in the processing of S1602. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times), so the special game state is ended. If the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect executed at the timing, four winning information can be acquired in most cases. The winning information acquired here indicates the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result that is likely to be a big win of the special symbol) during the special symbol probability change period. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine whether another special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it becomes a big hit of another special symbol during the probability change period of the special symbol, and the short time period of the new normal symbol is used even though the conventional short time period of the normal symbol is hardly used or not used at all. The period is set, and in addition, the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, which makes the player feel dissatisfied and the game value given It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the player feels lost. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game as much as possible, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game as much as possible.

  In the processing of S1603, when there is no winning information whose winning / failing is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603: No), the processing proceeds to S1614. On the other hand, if there is a winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot” (S1603: Yes), the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” jackpot type has three types of special symbol jackpot (jackpot) A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is judged whether it is “jackpot C” (S1604).

  In the processing of S1604, when the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed is “jackpot C” (S1604: Yes), after the currently running jackpot ends, the currently pending start It is determined whether or not the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the winning is “jackpot A” (S1605). In the process of S1604, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” that is currently being executed is identified based on the stop classification extracted from the stop classification command transmitted from the main control device 110, for example. Further, based on the winning information stored in the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed may be specified. In the processing of S1605, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is specified based on the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Here, when the processing of S1605 is executed, since it is determined Yes in the processing of S1603, the winning information in which the success or failure is “special symbol jackpot” in the winning information acquired in the processing of S1602. There is at least one. That is, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, there is at least one winning information which becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery performed from the first time to the fourth time. In the processing of S1605, when the “special symbol jackpot” that is currently being executed ends, and the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot A” (S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. Here, when the process of S1612 is executed, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is always performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winning, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”, If the next special symbol jackpot type is “Big Jack A” based on the pending start information, the process proceeds to S1612, and the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “definite effect display” is performed. Is done. Therefore, since the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol is not displayed, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of this normal symbol, and then the next special symbol jackpot Thus, even if the “short time period display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the previous short time period with the new short time period. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, by not displaying the longest period (100 times) of the short time period of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling strongly that the player has a sense of loss of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is finished, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot B” or “ If it is “big hit C” (S1605: No), the process proceeds to S1609. In the process of S1604, if the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is not “jackpot C” (S1604: No), whether the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is “jackpot A”. It is determined whether or not (S1606). In the processing of S1606, when the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is “jackpot A” (S1606: Yes), after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” ends, Based on the pending start information, it is determined whether or not the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is “jackpot C” (S1607). On the other hand, in the processing of S1606, when the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is not “big jackpot A” (that is, “big jackpot B”) (S1606: No), the processing proceeds to S1609. To do.

  In the processing of S1606, for example, based on the stop type extracted from the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110, the jackpot type of the “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed is specified. Further, based on the winning information stored in the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” currently being executed may be specified. In the processing of S1607, the jackpot type of “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next is specified based on the winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Here, when the processing of S1607 is executed, since it is determined Yes in the processing of S1603, the winning information whose winning / failing is “special symbol jackpot” is included in the winning information acquired in the processing of S1602. There is at least one. That is, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, there is at least one winning information which becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery performed from the first time to the fourth time.

  In the processing of S1607, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B” "(S1607: No), the process proceeds to S1609. On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, after the currently executed “special symbol jackpot” is completed, the “special symbol jackpot” to be executed next based on the currently held start information is “jackpot C”. In this case (S1607: Yes), the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1614. Here, when the short time period display flag 223f is set to ON, when the ending setting process is executed in association with the next “special symbol jackpot”, the process branches to No in the process of S1601 and proceeds to the process of S1614. The display mode of the ending effect corresponding to the next jackpot effect is always set to the short time display.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, there is a start winning that is a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot A”, When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “big jackpot C” based on the pending start information, the process branches to S1607: Yes, and the hourly number display flag 223f is set on, and then in S1614 The process transitions to the process, and the display mode of the ending effect is set so that the “short time display” is always performed. After that, when the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is performed, since the time reduction display flag 223f is set to ON, the process proceeds to the processing of S1614, and "time reduction display" is always performed. Thus, the display mode of the ending effect is set. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot, the “short time period display” is performed, respectively. The player can recognize a new short time period of normal symbols.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the processing of S1609, the value of the ending mode counter 223e is acquired (S1609), and the acquired counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1610). If the acquired counter value is included in the range in which execution of the confirmed effect display is selected and it is determined that the confirmed effect display is executed (S1611: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. In the process of S1612, the definite effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1612), and the process proceeds to S1615.

  In the process of S1611, when the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting execution of the short time period display and it is determined that the short time period display is to be executed (S1611: No), the process proceeds to S1614. In the process of S1614, a short time period display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1615.

  In the process of S1615, based on the display mode set by the process of S1612 or the process of S1614, a display ending command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Therefore, the setting is made (S1615). By receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 is controlled so that the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1311). This variable display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1708 is a stop type corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” (S1709). When the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “special symbol jackpot” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “exclusion of special symbol” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1712), the process proceeds to S1713. By this processing of S1712, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left Set to “3”, “4”, “1”) in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), when the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (in the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1713.

  If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1711, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, the chance type is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice number is set. Similarly to the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main controller 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1713, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1713). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice number counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1904), and then the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 34). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 45A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 36B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 16) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 36B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is handled. A stop type table is determined (S2401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

After the processing of S2403, the stop type information (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command (S2404: Yes), if the stop type is a jackpot stop type (S2404: Yes), the normal image transfer setting process starts transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect when it is on. The fanfare data transfer flag 223i notified to (S3303) is set to ON (S2405), this stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on this fanfare data transfer flag 223i, image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the large effect change effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  The display fanfare command for instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed, so that the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the change effect until the fanfare effect is started, and the player can operate. There was a risk of anxiety about whether it was stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device In 81, control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is completed before the fluctuating effect that is a big hit is completed. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2208: Yes), the fanfare command processing is executed (S2209), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command process is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the fanfare effect until the start of the round effect. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for five rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time until the jackpot variation display is finished in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2208 that there is no display fanfare command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display If there is an ending command (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2212 that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216). If (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 38 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 38A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the same process as the display setting process is performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 11B and 11C) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 36B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 42 to 44) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 37). As a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is changed. This means that it is determined that the jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), after setting the fanfare data transfer flag to off (S3510), the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the top address (storage source top address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  In the process of S3509, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but off (S3509: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 determines “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 is finished after the variation effect corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is finished. Shifts to the special gaming state, and the big symbol effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare effect is first performed, and then the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, while the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all five rounds) is finished, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. Then, when this ending effect is performed, either a confirmed effect display that informs that there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize or a “special symbol that is being executed” A short time period display for notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to “big jackpot” is performed.

  In addition, as described above, while the “ordinary symbol time-saving state” is continued, each time a new special symbol jackpot is reached, each time a short-term period (“ The regular symbol “short-time state” duration) is updated, so if the special symbol jackpot is newly added during the “normal symbol short-time state” duration, the normal symbol that was left before the new jackpot The short time period becomes invalid. For example, when “special symbol jackpot C” is set and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot C”. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the short time period until then becomes invalid, and in the “normal symbol normal state”, the special symbol lottery ends 20 times after the “big jackpot A” ends. Will continue until.

  As described above, the conventional pachinko machine or the present pachinko machine 10 may display a short time period in the ending effect and notify the player of the short time period of the normal symbol. In conventional pachinko machines, this notification may notify the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, and in this case, the player can easily compare the short time period It can be carried out. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened, and there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced. For example, when the short time period is “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, it gives the player the impression that the special symbol lottery has been shortened to “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”. . As a result, the player may be dissatisfied, or the player may feel lost in the assigned game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Furthermore, when the special symbol is a big win and the special symbol is in a high probability state after the big jackpot ends (the special symbol lottery period is four times during the special symbol change period, that is, after the big jackpot ends) Since it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot until it is finished), there is a high possibility that the next special symbol jackpot will be played immediately after the special symbol jackpot. Also, during the probable change period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and not very interested in whether or not it is in the short period of normal symbols. Even during the short time period of normal symbols, the player is unlikely to leave an impression that a game has been played using the short time period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. As a result, the player may feel that the short-term period has been set, and as a result, the player feels dissatisfied, or the player loses a sense of lost gaming value. There was a risk that the willingness to participate was further reduced.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, as described in the ending setting process (see FIG. 32), when performing the ending effect, the special symbol jackpot type of this time or “special” Based on the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot, decide whether to perform “definite effect display” or “short-time display”, and give the player the impression that the short-term period of the normal symbol has been shortened as much as possible I am trying not to. That is, control is performed so that the player is continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  More specifically, there is a start prize that is a special symbol jackpot in the pending start prize, and the special symbol jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, and it is pending. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot A” based on the starting information of “No jackpot C”, the “Ending effect display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big jackpot C”. Do. As a result, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time is not displayed, so the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol of this time, and then the jackpot of the next special symbol Thus, even if the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player cannot easily compare the short-term period of the normal symbol so far with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot C” has the shortest duration for normal symbols, “Last 100 special symbol lotteries”, and “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest duration for regular symbols “Special” "Until the symbol lottery ends 20 times" is the shortest. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened the most, so that the player feels dissatisfied strongly or the player feels the sense of loss of the assigned game value. It is possible to suppress the strong holding. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from being greatly reduced, the player can be continuously given the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” In the ending effect, the “determined effect display” may be performed without performing the “short time period display”. “Special symbol jackpot C” is set so that the short-term period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. . Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, if there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, it corresponds to “jackpot C” If the “determined effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the longest period (100 times) of the normal symbol's short time period is not displayed, so the player can easily recognize the short time period of the current normal symbol. After that, even if the next special symbol is a big hit and the “short-term display” is performed in the ending production, the player will compare the short-term period of the conventional symbol with the short-term period of the new normal symbol. Cannot be done easily. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, instead of merely performing “short-term display”, the “confirmed effect display” as in the pachinko machine 10 can be used to divert the player's interest from the short-term length of the normal symbol. . That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In this pachinko machine 10, there is a start prize that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prize, and the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”. When the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the pending start information, the “Definite Play Display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”. Ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol when the short-term period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the next special symbol is shorter than the short-term period of the regular symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the symbol, and In addition, at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot may be configured not to perform the “short-term display”. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes.

  As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, the player feels dissatisfied or the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described in the ending setting process (see FIG. 32), in order to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, “special symbol jackpot” is included in the pending start prize. And the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “Big jackpot A” and the special jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big jackpot C” based on the pending startup information. Performs “short-term display” in the ending production corresponding to each jackpot. In the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol and the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol each time, “short time period display”, respectively, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and a new normal Since the player can recognize the short time period of the symbol, the player can compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol.

  In particular, “Special design jackpot A” has the shortest short time period for ordinary symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, and “Special symbol jackpot C” has the shortest time period for ordinary symbols “Special” “Until the symbol lottery ends 100 times” is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended the most, so that the player has the impression that the short time period with the highest added value among the short time periods of the normal symbol has been obtained. In addition, since it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become the most advantageous from the previous time, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, there is a start prize that is a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start prizes, and the special symbol jackpot type of this time is “jackpot A”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Bonus C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot, but this special symbol When the short-term duration of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot type is longer than the short-term duration of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, the “short-term display” in the ending effect corresponding to each jackpot May be performed. If configured in this way, the player can recognize the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol, respectively, so that the player has the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol has become more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that the game value with higher added value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the ending setting process (see FIG. 32) immediately before performing the ending effect. This is because more winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a than when the special symbol lottery result is determined to be a big win or when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state (5R big win). This is because there is a high possibility. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, when the player hits the special winning opening 65a in the special gaming state, Many balls enter the mouth 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  Therefore, it is better to wait until the end of the ending effect that is executed at the timing when the special gaming state ends than to acquire the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in advance. There is a high possibility that more winning information can be acquired from the storage area 223a. Therefore, in the process of S1603, it is possible to increase the possibility that it is determined that there is winning information in which the success / failure is “special symbol jackpot”. That is, since the possibility of branching to S1603: Yes can be increased, the ending display mode is set to “determined effect display” or the ending display mode is set to “based on the processing of S1604 to S1611 described above. Opportunities for controlling whether to set “short time display” can be increased. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied, or to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value. It can be suppressed and the player can continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player feel that the short time period of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the previous time, or to give the player the impression that a higher added value game value has been obtained, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10, when the big win of the special symbol, regardless of the type of jackpot, it becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5R jackpot), and then, as added value after the jackpot ends, From the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends four times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change period). And while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), the special number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls is reached. Until the symbol lottery ends, the state of special symbol change (during the special symbol change period) is maintained.

  In the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit during the probability change period of the special symbol. Is likely to be. Also, during the probable period of special symbols, players are strongly interested in whether or not the special symbol will be a big hit, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state (during the special symbol's short-term period) Even if it is during a short period of time for normal symbols, it is difficult for the player to leave an impression that a game has been played using that short period. Therefore, if a special symbol wins a big bonus during the probable change period of a special symbol, the player can use a new normal symbol with little or no use of the short time period of the conventional symbol. There is a risk of feeling that a short time period has been set. With conventional pachinko machines, when the newly set short time is shorter than the previous short time period of normal symbols, the player may feel dissatisfied or lose the sense of lost gaming value. May be held by the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, after winning the special symbol jackpot, as shown in the processing of S1602, after waiting until the start of the ending effect, the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a. . As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times), so the special game state is ended. If the winning information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect executed at the timing, four winning information can be acquired in most cases. The winning information acquired here indicates the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result that is likely to be a big win of the special symbol) during the special symbol probability change period. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine whether another special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it becomes a big hit of another special symbol during the probability change period of the special symbol, and the short time period of the new normal symbol is used even though the conventional short time period of the normal symbol is hardly used or not used at all. The period is set, and in addition, the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, which makes the player feel dissatisfied and the game value given It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the player feels lost. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game as much as possible, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game as much as possible.

  In addition, the short time period (for example, “20 chances”) of the normal symbol displayed in the “short time period display” of the above embodiment corresponds to the “period information” described in the claims, and the above embodiment. Display content (for example, “Super Chance!”) Corresponds to “other information” described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired by the main control device 110, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) is pre-read (predicted), and the pre-read Is received from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, various information obtained by prefetching may be included in the reserved ball number command and transmitted without transmitting the winning information command. With such a configuration, the number of reserved balls and various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) are included in the reserved ball number command. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, the correspondence between the number of held balls and various types of information becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of held balls and various information is always accurate without paying attention to the timing of receiving commands, the number of held balls and various information from the RAM. Can be performed accurately.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the 3rd symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and as a result, the 3rd symbol display device 81 The variation effect according to the variation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the variation effect ends, the stop type stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing stop display of a stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the scheduled execution time of the variable effect is set. You may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued even if it complete | finishes.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the normal symbol time-saving state is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times. ”Will continue until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times after the end of the“ big hit B ”, and when the“ big hit C ”is reached, the special symbol lottery will be started after the“ big hit C ”ends. The time-short state of the normal symbol is continued until 100 times are finished, but the duration of the time-short state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed 60 times, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends 120 times after the" big hit C "ends. The short state may be continued at this time. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of the high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the 1st entrance 64 will be opened only "1 second x 2 times", What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the pending start-up information, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. , Corresponding to the special symbol jackpot when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot type is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the special symbol this time At least one of the ending effect and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is configured not to display “short-term display”. It may be. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. Therefore, the short time period of the new normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, and the player can hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. When not performing the “short time display”, the “confirmed effect display” can be used to divert the player's interest from the short time length of the normal symbol. That is, when the “definite effect display” is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a start prize that will be a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and the player's interest can be directed to the special game state. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the short time, the player cannot easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol this time, and then it becomes a big hit of the next special symbol, Even if the “short time display” is performed in the ending effect, the player cannot easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol so far with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “jackpot A” based on the pending start-up information, the “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “jackpot C”. Ending effect corresponding to this special symbol jackpot when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is shorter than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot this time In this case, the “short time display” may not be performed. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the short time period of the normal symbol is not displayed, so even if the next special symbol is a big jackpot and the “short time period display” is performed in that ending effect The player cannot easily compare the conventional short time period of the normal symbol and the new normal symbol short time period. Therefore, the new short time period of the normal symbol is shorter than the previous short time period, making it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or lost feeling of the assigned game value. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. In addition, since the “short-duration display” is not performed in the ending performance performed earlier, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the longer short-duration period. Can distract consciousness. Therefore, in the next ending effect, when “short time period display” is performed and the player recognizes the shorter time period, it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the shorter time period. Accordingly, since the current short time period may be shorter than the previous short time period, the player's consciousness can be diverted, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are put on hold, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the starting information, the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but the pending start winning prize If there is a start winning prize that will be a “special design jackpot”, and if the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, the ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol, and next time It may be configured so that “short-time display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the special symbol jackpot. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, the “short-term display” is not performed in at least one of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. A player cannot easily recognize at least one of the short time period and the short time period of a new normal symbol. In particular, the special symbol jackpot C is set so that the short time period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter, the player will not be able to easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied or having the player lose a sense of lost game value. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game more continuously. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the starting winning prizes that are put on hold, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “jackpot C”. If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack A” based on the starting information, the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect corresponding to “Big Jack C”, but the pending start winning prize If there is a start-up prize that will be a “special design jackpot”, and if the jackpot type of this special symbol is “jackpot C”, in the ending production corresponding to this special symbol jackpot, You may comprise so that "period display" may not be performed. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, in the ending production corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the “short time period display” is not performed, so the player can compare the short time period of the conventional normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Is not easily recognized. In particular, the special symbol jackpot C is set so that the short time period of the normal symbol is the longest, “until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times”, and the probability of winning is the lowest because it is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the next special symbol is a big hit, there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter (such as 50 times or 20 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol will be set shorter, the player will not be able to easily compare the short time period of the normal symbol with the short time period of the new normal symbol. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied or having the player lose a sense of lost game value. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game more continuously. Further, by not notifying the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time, the player cannot easily recognize the shorter short time period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol is shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied and to prevent the player from feeling lost of the assigned game value, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. If you do not want to display “short-term display”, you can keep the player willing to participate in the game for the same reason as described above by performing “definite effect display”. Can do. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. When the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is longer than the short-term duration of the regular symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot, the “short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending effect You may comprise as follows. As a result, in the ending effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot of this time and the ending effect corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot, the “short time period display” is performed, respectively. Then, the player can recognize the short time period of the newly set normal symbol. Therefore, since the player can easily compare the normal symbol time and short-term, the short time period of the new normal symbol is longer than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, and the short time period of the normal symbol is extended. The player can be given the impression that Accordingly, the player can be given an impression that a game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. Ending production corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol, when the short period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special jackpot is longer than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, and You may comprise so that "display for a short time period" may be performed in at least one of the ending effects corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol. For example, if “short-duration display” is performed in the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol this time, and “short-duration display” is not performed in the ending presentation corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol, this normal symbol Only the short time period is notified, and the next short time period of the normal symbol is not notified. In this case, since the player can recognize only the short time period of the current normal symbol, even after the new short time period is set, the player pays attention to the short time period of the current normal symbol. However, the newly set normal symbol time-short period is longer than the conventional normal symbol time-short period, so after the new normal symbol time-short period has been set, the player is paying more attention to the short-time period. It will be longer and shorter. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended and the game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. Correspond to the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of this special symbol when the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the next special symbol jackpot is longer than the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol In the ending production, “Short-term display” is performed. It may be configured so as not to perform the "time-shortening period Display" in the production. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, only the short time period of the current normal symbol is notified, and the short time period of the next normal symbol is not notified. Therefore, since the player can recognize only the short time period of the current normal symbol, even after a new short time period is set, the player pays attention to the short time period of the current normal symbol. However, the newly set normal symbol time-short period is longer than the conventional normal symbol time-short period, so after the new normal symbol time-short period has been set, the player is paying more attention to the short-time period. It will be longer and shorter. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been extended and the game value with higher added value has been obtained, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game. In addition, after the player recognizes that the short time period of the normal symbol is extended, the player does not know how long the extension will continue, so that the player can be delighted and can increase the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, there is a start winning that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” in the pending start winnings, and the jackpot type of the special symbol this time is “big jack A If the jackpot type of the next special symbol is “Big Jack C” based on the pending start information, “Short-term display” is performed in each jackpot ending production. If the jackpot type of the special symbol is “Big Jack A”, the “Ending effect” corresponding to the jackpot of the next special symbol will be displayed in the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol this time. It may be configured so that the “short-time display” is not performed in the ending effect corresponding to. In order not to perform the “short time period display”, for example, information different from the “short time period display” may be displayed. As another display, a “determined effect display”, a display simply showing a special symbol jackpot, and the like are exemplified. However, the “determined effect display” is performed only when there is a start prize that becomes a “special symbol jackpot” among the pending start prizes. As a result, only the short time period of the current normal symbol is notified, and the short time period of the next normal symbol is not notified. “Special symbol jackpot A” has the shortest period for regular symbols “until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times”, so if the next special symbol is a big hit, the regular symbol hourly period Is likely to be set longer (for example, 50 times or 100 times). Therefore, when there is a high possibility that the short time period of the normal symbol is set longer, it is possible to notify only the short time period of the current normal symbol and not to notify the short time period of the next normal symbol. Therefore, the player performs the game while expecting that the short time period of the newly set normal symbol is longer than the previous short time period of the normal symbol, so the player is newly set. You will be anxious about the short time period of normal symbols. In addition, after the player recognizes that the newly set normal symbol has a shorter time period than the normal symbol's previous short time period, and the normal symbol has a shorter time period, Players will be glad because they don't know how long the extension will last. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since it is determined by the jackpot type of the special symbol this time without determining the jackpot type of the next special symbol, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player willing to participate in the game with a simple process.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when performing the ending effect, based on the jackpot type of the special symbol this time and the next jackpot type of the “special jackpot of special symbol” in the pending start winning prize, “Determined effect display” or “Short-term display” is selected, but instead of the special symbol jackpot type and the last ending effect, the final effect display (or short-term period) Display), and based on the last special jackpot type of the special symbol, the final special jackpot display in the last ending production, and the special jackpot type of the current special symbol, Or “short-term display” may be selected. Specifically, if the jackpot type of the previous special symbol is “jackpot C” and the time-short display is performed in the previous ending effect, the “determined effect display” is performed in the current ending effect. If configured in this way, the short time period of the normal symbol of this time is not notified, so even if the short time display was performed in the previous ending effect, the short time period of the normal symbol so far and the short time period of the new normal symbol The player cannot easily compare with the period. Therefore, it can make it difficult for the player to recognize the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been shortened, so that the player feels dissatisfied and the player has a feeling of loss of the assigned game value. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game. In addition, if the jackpot type of the last special symbol is “Big Jack A” and the time-short display is performed in the previous ending effect, “time-short display” is performed in the current ending effect. If configured in this way, both the previous ending performance and the current ending performance will be displayed with a shorter number of times, so the comparison between the conventional short time period of the normal symbol and the new normal symbol short time period Can be performed by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the impression that the short time period of the normal symbol has been greatly extended, it is possible to give the player the impression that a higher added value gaming value has been obtained. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the main control device 110 receives a start winning, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning Based on the value, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted, and the various information is given to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Notify. Instead, when the start winning is made in the main controller 110, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in accordance with the start winning are used as they are. The voice lamp control device 113 may be notified by a winning information command. When configured in this manner, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 so that the sound lamp control device 113 can prefetch the lottery result of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) and the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown) for low probability are stored in the sound lamp controller ROM 222, respectively. In addition, among the start winning processes (see FIG. 20) executed in the main controller 110, the processes of S408 to S413 are stored in the ROM 222 so that they can be executed in the audio lamp controller 113, and the pre-reading probability change is further performed. A middle counter 203g is provided in the RAM 223. With this configuration, when a winning information command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the winning information command, and thereafter, S408. The process of S413 can be executed to prefetch the lottery result in the special symbol. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol, so the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further reduced and the transition should be made based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It can concentrate on the lottery process which draws a game state. However, since there is a possibility that important random numbers such as jackpot random numbers may be found illegally, the lottery result (win / fail), stop type, and variation pattern are included in the winning information command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. It is preferable. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main controller 110 from being illegally stolen and analyzing each value of each of the counters C1 to C3. In addition, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, the process which determines whether a continuous notice effect is started (continuous notice determination process of FIG. 31), and the process which determines the display mode of an ending effect (FIG. 32). However, the display control device 114 may execute these processes. In that case, a program for executing each process so that the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 31 and the ending setting process in FIG. 32 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous notice determination table 222a are provided. It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). In addition, in the work RAM 233, the above-described winning information storage area 223a, special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, ending state counter 223e, short time period display flag 223f, continuous notice determination counter 223g, continuous notice number counter 223h, post-notice big hit flag 223i. Each memory is provided. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command to the display control device 114 as it is. When receiving the winning information command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (continuous notice determination processing in FIG. 31). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114 when receiving the ending command from the main control device 110. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining a display mode of the ending effect (ending setting processing in FIG. 32).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 42). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 43) when the above is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the rear image of the super reach that is expected to have a high appearance frequency or a high frequency is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, whereby the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the third symbol display device 81 and Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 receives various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of start winning that is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Although the case where the information is included in the number-of-holding balls command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , Information of the stop type selection counter C3) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 performs a special operation based on various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of winning a winning in the winning information command. Including various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) indicating the symbol lottery result, the winning information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command. Estimate the lottery result of special symbols and the stop type after changing production according to the various information included (whether, stop type, change pattern). In the case where it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect based on the estimation result and the number of held balls held at that time They were bright, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 determines the values of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, first stop type selection counter C3) corresponding to the start-winning from the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning. May be included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 may determine whether to perform the continuous notice effect based on the notified various counter values. Further, main controller 110 may perform the continuous notice effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the fluctuating effect estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the start prize. And at least the determination result is included in the winning information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 finally performs the continuous notice effect based on the determination result. You may decide. Further, it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 performs the continuous notice effect, and the determination result is included in the winning information command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs the effect of the continuous notice effect. Only the aspect may be determined. As information to be included in the winning information command, information on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the estimated starting winning prize, information on the stop type after the changing effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the continuous notice effect By using the information as to whether or not to perform, the command size of the winning information command can be reduced as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or information on whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command different from the winning information command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1410) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 30), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. In other words, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the embodiment described above, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete out reach) determined by the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been suspended is displayed. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Then, the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1704 in FIG. 33) changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed in the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entrance 64 is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily the case. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases, respectively), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each individual variable effect. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. It may be provided. In the continuous notice determination process, when a continuous notice effect is performed (S1517: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, and the variation pattern of the variable effect that is determined. , A gaming state after the end of a series of continuous notice effects (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, miss), or a combination of two or more thereof. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence is generated. Various flags such as a flag are generated. Based on the flag, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as a warning image is generated. Or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown. Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of the start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random numbers stored in the random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of information, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means The lottery means the lottery means a lot of special periods that are set after the special gaming state is finished and the start condition is easily established. One of the first specifying means specified based on the result, the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means, and the information different from the period information is the first information. Special In order to perform notification by the notifying means in a gaming machine comprising notifying means for informing before a period is started and period setting means for setting the first special period after the special gaming state has ended. The lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the storage information acquisition means And when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, a special period set after the special gaming state ends A second specifying means for specifying one of the plurality of special periods based on the determined lottery result, and a special period specified by the second specifying means. The lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the period comparison means for comparing the second special period to be set next to the first special period and the first special period. If the result of the lottery results in the transition to the special gaming state, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, the notification is made according to the setting of the first special period. In at least one or both of the notification performed by the means and the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period, any one of the period information and other information depending on the predetermined result A gaming machine A1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of them is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the starting condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit, and the random number stored in the random number information storage unit When one piece of information is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit becomes the lottery result and shifts to the special gaming state in the gaming machine A1, the notification control unit In the comparison result, if the second special period is shorter than the first special period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and the second special period The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the other information is notified at least in one of notifications performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting.

  According to the gaming machine A2, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is shorter than the period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that at least one of the other information is notified. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state in which a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is shorter than the first special period, the first special period And the player cannot easily recognize at least one of the length of the second special period and the length of the second special period. Accordingly, the player can easily make a comparison between the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period, so that a large number of the first special period remains and is newly set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied because the length of the second special period is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notification control unit compares the period when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result. If the second special period is shorter than the first special period in the comparison result of the means, the other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. The game machine A3 is characterized by controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is shorter than the period, the notification unit is controlled by the notification control unit so that other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The Therefore, of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period, in the notification performed earlier, the period information Is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the first special period which is the longer one of the first special period and the second special period. The player's consciousness can be diverted from the period. Therefore, when the player recognizes the second special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period, by the notification that is made later, The special period can be strongly conscious of the player, and the player's consciousness can be diverted because the second special period may be shorter than the first special period. Therefore, it can suppress more that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, and a player can have a willingness to participate in a game more continuously.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison unit, the notification is performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The game machine A4, wherein the notification means is controlled so that other information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A4, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the notification means causes the notification means to notify other information in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Be controlled. When the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the length of the newly set second special period may be shorter than the length of the first special period. is there. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the length of the second special period newly set is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time, the length of the first special period and the second Comparison with the length of the special period can be easily made impossible for the player. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied because the length of the second special period newly set is shorter than the length of the first special period set last time. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, the player can be further encouraged to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison means The gaming machine A5 controls the notification means so that the other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine A5, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the longest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods, the notification unit performs the setting according to the setting of the first special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that other information is notified in the notification. Therefore, although the first special period set first is the longest, a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain, and the newly set second special period is set. When the special period is the shortest, the player cannot easily recognize the length of the first special period, and the player compares the length of the first special period with the length of the second special period. It can be easily disabled. Therefore, a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the length of the second special period is the shortest even though the length of the first special period is the longest. It can be suppressed that the player feels dissatisfied strongly. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game from greatly decreasing, it is possible to make the player have more willingness to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the period comparison unit is a special period specified by the second identification unit immediately after the notification by the notification unit, and is next to the first special period. A gaming machine A6, which compares a second special period to be set with the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the second special period that is specified by the second specifying unit and is set next to the first special period immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. The first special period is compared with the period comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison by the period comparison means is performed, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that random number information is stored in the means can be increased, and the possibility that the special period is specified by the second specifying means can be increased. Therefore, since the opportunity for comparison by the period comparison means can be increased, the opportunity for the notification means to be controlled by the notification control means can be increased, and the player has an opportunity to continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. Can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the other information is random number information stored in the random number information storage means and lottery means for each random number information not acquired by the stored information acquisition means by the lottery means. The game machine A7 is characterized by suggesting that the game state shifts to the special game state in accordance with any lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the other information is the random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and when the lottery means performs lottery for each random number information not acquired by the stored information acquisition means, It is suggested that the game state is shifted to the special game state according to any lottery result. Since the special game state is a state advantageous to the player, if other information which is information suggesting the transition to the special game state is notified by the notification means, it is easy to attract the player's interest in the notification. Therefore, since the player's interest can be diverted from the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period, the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period The player can be made more difficult to recognize, and the player can be made more difficult to compare the length of the first special period and the length of the second special period. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, by notifying other information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to have a willingness to participate in the game.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of the start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random numbers stored in the random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of information, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means The lottery means the lottery means a lot of special periods that are set after the special gaming state is finished and the start condition is easily established. One of the first specifying means specified based on the result, the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means, and the information different from the period information is the first information. Special In order to perform notification by the notifying means in a gaming machine comprising notifying means for informing before a period is started and period setting means for setting the first special period after the special gaming state has ended. The lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the storage information acquisition means And when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, a special period set after the special gaming state ends A second specifying means for specifying one of the plurality of special periods based on the determined lottery result, and a special period specified by the second specifying means. The lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the period comparison means for comparing the second special period to be set next to the first special period and the first special period. If the result of the lottery results in the transition to the special gaming state, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, the notification is made according to the setting of the first special period. In at least one or both of the notification performed by the means and the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period, any one of the period information and other information depending on the predetermined result A gaming machine B1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of them is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit, and the random number stored in the random number information storage unit When one piece of information is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the notification control unit compares the period when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit includes the lottery result and shifts to the special gaming state. If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the means, the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. A gaming machine B2 that controls the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the special period has been extended, and to make the player feel advantageous. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit shifts to the special gaming state due to the lottery result, the notification control unit determines whether the period comparison unit If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result, the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period. The informing means is controlled, and the informing means is controlled so that the other information is informed in the informing performed by the informing means according to the setting of the second special period. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Is done. Further, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that other information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, since the player does not know how long the extension will continue, the player can be relieved. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the transition to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison unit, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period; The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the value information is notified both in accordance with the notification performed by the notifying means in accordance with the setting of the special period of 2.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to a special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the second special period is longer than the period, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified in both cases. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is longer than the first special period, the length of the first special period And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period and the player can feel that the special period has been extended, the player can feel that the player has gained an advantage. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the notification control means, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means to shift to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, If the length of the first special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison means The value information is reported both in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and in the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period. The game machine B5 is characterized by controlling the notification means as described above.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the first special in the comparison result of the period comparison means If the length of the period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the notification means performs the setting according to the setting of the first special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified both in the notification and in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the second special period. Therefore, the first special period is set when a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain and the first special period is the shortest but the second special period is the longest. And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Accordingly, the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period, and the player can feel that the special period has been extended the most, so that the player can feel more advantageous. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the period comparison unit is a special period specified by the second specification unit immediately after the notification by the notification unit and is subsequent to the first special period. A gaming machine B6, which compares the second special period to be set with the first special period.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the second special period that is specified by the second specifying unit and is set next to the first special period immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. The first special period is compared with the period comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison by the period comparison means is performed, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that random number information is stored in the means can be increased, and the possibility that the special period is specified by the second specifying means can be increased. Therefore, since the opportunity for comparison by the period comparison means can be increased, the opportunity for the notification means to be controlled by the notification control means can be increased, and the player has an opportunity to continue to have a willingness to participate in the game. Can be increased.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at a start opening and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen (for example, Patent Document 1). : JP-A-11-333089). In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit and the game state shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the game value given to the player along with the transition is notified in advance (Preliminary effects) are made, and the device is designed to increase the player's expectation by making the player recognize in advance the transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player and the value of the game to be given. ing.
In such a pachinko machine, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit and the game state is shifted to a special game state, a special period is a period during which the game ball can easily enter the start opening as a game value given to the player. The length of is set according to the jackpot type. In addition, there is one that performs the above-described notice effect and notifies the player of the length of the special period in advance. On the other hand, in such a pachinko machine, when a new lottery is performed with a special period remaining, and the lottery result is a big hit and a transition is made to a special game state, the length of the special period in the future will be Many are set according to the jackpot type of a new lottery result.
In this type of pachinko machine, if the special period remains, it will be a big hit, and the new special period will be longer than the previous special period. If the notice effect is made so that only one of the length of the special period is recognized by the player, it will be difficult for the player to compare the length of the special period, so it seems as if the special period has been extended. Even in this case, the player may not recognize it and may not feel that the player has gained an advantage. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may not continue.
This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continuously have a willingness to participate in a game. .
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 stores a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit that acquires random number information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the random number information acquisition unit. Random number information storage means, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, When shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, a special period during which the start condition is easily established is set after the special gaming state ends. Period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means specified by the first specifying means and the first specifying means specified based on the lottery result of the lottery means from a plurality of different special periods And notification means for notifying one of the information different from the period information until the first special period is started, and a period setting for setting the first special period after the special gaming state ends And the random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means is performed by the lottery means for performing notification by the notification means. When there is a lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result of the lottery to be determined, and among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, there is a transition to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result. A second specifying means for specifying one special period set after the special gaming state is ended based on the lottery result determined from the plurality of special periods; Means for comparing the second special period, which is a special period specified by the means and is set next to the first special period, and the first special period, and the lottery result If there is a lottery result determined by the determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, the first result In at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period, the period information and other information Among them, there is provided notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of them is notified according to the predetermined result.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the notification control unit is configured so that the lottery result is determined in the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit. If the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison means, the notification is made according to the setting of the first special period. The notification means is controlled so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the notification control means has the lottery result in the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, Depending on the setting of the first special period, if there is something that shifts to the special gaming state, if the second special period is longer than the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison means. The notification means is controlled so that the value information is notified both in the notification performed by the notification means and in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the second special period. .
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the notification control means becomes the lottery result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining means. When there is something that shifts to the special gaming state, the length of the first special period is the shortest of the plurality of special periods in the comparison result of the period comparison means, and the second special period If the length of the plurality of special periods is the longest, the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period and the notification means according to the setting of the second special period The notifying means is controlled so that the value information is notified both in the notification performed by.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the random number information is stored in the random number information storage unit, and the random number information storage unit stores the random number information. When one piece of stored random number information is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the random number information. And when shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means, there is a special period during which the start condition is easily established after the special game state is ended. One of a plurality of special periods having different lengths is specified by the first specifying means based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Then, one of the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means and the information different from the period information is notified before the first special period is started. And the first special period is set by the period setting means after the special gaming state ends. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the stored information acquisition means for notification by the notification means Is determined by the lottery result determination means, and when there is one that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result among the determined lottery results, a special period that is set after the special gaming state ends Is specified by the second specifying means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means from among the plurality of special periods. Then, the second special period, which is the special period specified by the second specifying means and is set next to the first special period, is compared with the first special period by the period comparison means, If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the first special is obtained if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result. According to a predetermined result among the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that one of them is notified. Therefore, based on the relationship between the first special period and the second special period, notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period, and notification unit according to the setting of the second special period It is possible to allow the player to recognize an appropriate one of the period information and other information in at least one or both of the notifications performed by the above. Therefore, since the player can be guided so as to have a good impression, there is an effect that the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is the second more than the first special period. If the special period is longer, the notification means controls the notification means so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to at least the length of the first special period, which is the shorter special period of the first special period and the second special period. Therefore, after the new second special period is set, if the player does not recognize the length of the second special information, the player pays attention to the length of the first special period. Play a game. However, since the new second special period is longer than the first special period, the special period lasts longer than the special period focused by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the special period has been extended, and to make the player feel advantageous. As a result, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is the second more than the first special period. If the special period is longer, the value information is present in both the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period. The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so as to be notified. Therefore, when a new second special period is set in a state where a large number of the first special period remains, and the second special period is longer than the first special period, the length of the first special period And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period and the player can feel that the special period has been extended, the player can feel that the player has gained an advantage. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the length of the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison means is If the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, a notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period, and a second The notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the value information is notified both in the notification performed by the notification means in accordance with the setting of the special period. Therefore, the first special period is set when a new second special period is set in a state where many first special periods remain and the first special period is the shortest but the second special period is the longest. And the length of the second special period can be recognized by the player. Accordingly, the first special period that has been set is changed to the second special period, and the player can feel that the special period has been extended the most, so that the player can feel more advantageous. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device ( an example of image display means )
110 Main control device (an example of main control means)
114 Display control device (an example of sub-control means)
233b Data table storage area (an example of first regulation information storage means and second regulation information storage means)
233f pointer (an example of first update means and second update means)
234 Character ROM (an example of first image storage means)
236 Normal video RAM (an example of second image storage means)
237 Image controller (an example of image drawing means)

Claims (4)

Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of the start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random numbers stored in the random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of information, lottery means for performing lottery based on random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result of the lottery means The lottery means the lottery means a lot of special periods that are set after the special gaming state is finished and the start condition is easily established. One of the first specifying means specified based on the result, the period information indicating the length of the first special period specified by the first specifying means, and the information different from the period information is the first information. Special And informing means for informing by a period is started, in the gaming machine that includes a period setting means for setting the first special period after the special game state is completed,
In order to perform the notification by the notification means, the lottery information to be performed by the lottery means for each random number information stored in the random number information storage means and not acquired by the storage information acquisition means. Lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result;
If there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the plurality of special periods set after the special gaming state ends Second specifying means for specifying one of the special periods based on the determined lottery result;
A period comparison unit that compares the first special period with a second special period that is specified by the second specifying unit and that is set next to the first special period. ,
If there is one in which the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, if the comparison result of the period comparison means is a predetermined result, In at least one or both of the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period, the period information and another A gaming machine comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the information is notified according to the predetermined result. The notification control means includes
When there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is more than the first special period. If the second special period is longer, the notification means is controlled so that the value information is notified in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the first special period. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The notification control means includes
When there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special gaming state by becoming the lottery result, the comparison result of the period comparison means is more than the first special period. If the second special period is longer, the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the first special period and the notification performed by the notification unit according to the setting of the second special period The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the value information is notified in both of the cases. The notification control means includes
When there is a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means that shifts to the special game state by becoming the lottery result, the length of the first special period in the comparison result of the period comparison means Is the shortest of the plurality of special periods and the length of the second special period is the longest of the plurality of special periods, the notification means according to the setting of the first special period The notification means is controlled so that the value information is notified both in the notification to be performed and in the notification performed by the notification means according to the setting of the second special period. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.

Images